512
Abbreviation list
Abbreviation/Acronym list
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
A/C Air Conditioning
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ACC Accessory
ALR Automatic Locking Retractor
CRS Child Restraint System
ECU Electronic Control Unit
EDR Event Data Recorder
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor
EPS Electric Power Steering
GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating
GCWR
Gross Combination Weight Rating
GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
I/M Emission inspection and maintenance
LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
LED Light Emitting Diode
M+S Mud and Snow
MAX Maximum
MIN Minimum
MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
MTBE Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether
OBD On Board Diagnostics
SRS Supplemental Restraint System
TIN Tire Identification Number
TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System
513
Abbreviation list
TRAC Traction Control
TWR Trailer Weight Rating
VIN Vehicle Identification Number
VSC Vehicle Stability Control
ABBREVIATIONS MEANING
15
For your information
Main Owner’s Manual
Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including
options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not
installed on your vehicle.
All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.
However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we
reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.
Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ
from your vehicle in terms of equipment.
Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine
Approximately five hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound
coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel
evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.
Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota
A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota
vehicles are currently available on the market. You should know that these
parts are not covered by Toyota warranty and that Toyota is not responsible
for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may
cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.
This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products.
Modification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance,
safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In
addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification
may not be covered under warranty.
16
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect
electronic systems such as:
● Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system
● Cruise control system
● Anti-lock brake system
● SRS airbag system
● Seat belt pretensioner system
Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or spe-
cial instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.
Vehicle control and operation data recording
Your Toyota is equipped with sophisticated computers that record certain
information about your vehicle’s operation, such as:
• Engine speed
• Accelerator status
• Brake status
• Vehicle speed
• Shift position (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
The data recorded varies according to the grade level and options the vehi-
cle is equipped with. The computers do not record conversations, sound or
pictures.
● Data usage
Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunc-
tions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.
Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:
• With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if
the vehicle is leased
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or
vehicle owner
17
Event data recorder
This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur-
pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations,
such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed
to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-
tened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake
pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ-
ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine
the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access
to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer,
other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can
read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
18
● Disclosure of the EDR data
Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except
when:
• An agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle)
is obtained
• In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-
ment agency
• For use by Toyota in a law suit
However, if necessary, Toyota may:
• Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance
• Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing
information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner
Scrapping of your Toyota
The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain
explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt
pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be
sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner
removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota
dealer before you scrap your vehicle.
Perchlorate Material
Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These compo-
nents may include airbags, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote con-
trol batteries.
19
CAUTION
■ General precautions while driving
Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-
ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-
cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and
reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in
death or serious injury.
Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other
drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.
Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-
tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or
reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,
your occupants or others.
■ General precaution regarding children’s safety
Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to
have or use the key.
Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.
There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with
the cigarette lighter, the windows, or other features of the vehicle. In addi-
tion, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be
fatal to children.
20
Symbols used throughout this manual
Cautions & Notices
Symbols used in illustrations
CAUTION
This is a warning against anything which may cause death or injury to people if
the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do
in order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or
its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must
or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota
and its equipment.
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through means “Do not”, “Do not
do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning,
etc.) used to operate switches and other
devices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation
(e.g. a lid opens).
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
1
Before driving
Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,
mirrors, and steering column.
2
When driving
Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.
3
Interior fea-
tures
Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-
terior features for a comfortable driving experience.
4
Maintenance
and care
Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-
yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.
5
When trouble
arises
What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat
tire, or is involved in an accident.
6
Vehicle
specifications
Detailed vehicle information.
7
For owners
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners, and seat belt
and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners
Index
Alphabetical listing of information contained in this
manual.
22
1-1. Key information
Keys
The following keys are provided with the vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key system
Electronic keys
• Operating the smart key
system (→P. 25)
• Operating the wireless
remote control function
(→P. 36)
Mechanical keys
Key number plate
Vehicles without smart key system (type A)
Master keys
Operating the wireless remote
control function (→P. 36)
Valet key
Key number plate
Vehicles without smart key system (type B)
Master keys (black)
Valet key (gray)
Key number plate
23
1-1. Key information
1
Before driving
Using the mechanical key (vehicles with smart key system)
Take out the mechanical key.
After using the mechanical key,
store it in the electronic key. Carry
the mechanical key together with
the electronic key. If the electronic
key battery is depleted or the
entry function does not operate
properly, you will need the
mechanical key. (→P. 448)
■ When required to leave a key to the vehicle with a parking attendant
Set the trunk opener cancelling system. (→P. 48)
Vehicles with smart key system: Remove the mechanical key for your own
use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.
Vehicles without smart key system: Carry the master key for your own use
and leave the valet key only with the attendant.
■ Key number plate
Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the
event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by your Toyota dealer using
the key number plate. (→P. 447)
■ When riding in an aircraft
When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft,
make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft
cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc, ensure that the buttons are
not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to
emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.
24
1-1. Key information
NOTICE
■ To prevent key damage
● Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high tempera-
tures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.
● Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any mate-
rial that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.
● Do not disassemble the electronic key.
25
1
Before driving
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Smart key system
∗
The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the
electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.
(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)
Locks and unlocks the doors (→P. 26)
Unlocks the trunk (→P. 26)
Starts the engine (→P. 131)
Electronic key
Electronic key
Electronic key
∗: If equipped
26
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Unlocking and locking the doors (front door handles only)
Grip the driver's door handle to
unlock the door. Grip the passen-
ger's door handle to unlock all
the doors.*
Make sure to touch the sensor on
the back of the handle.
The door cannot be unlocked for
3 seconds after the door is
locked.
*: The door unlock settings can
be changed. (→P. 30)
Press the lock button to lock the
door.
Unlocking the trunk
Press the button to unlock the
trunk.
27
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Antenna location and effective range
■ Antenna location
Antennas outside the cabin
Antenna outside the trunk
Antenna inside the trunk
Antennas inside the cabin
28
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is
detected)
When locking or unlocking
the doors
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
either of the outside front
door handles. (Only the
doors detecting the key can
be operated.)
When starting the engine
or changing “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
modes
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
inside the vehicle.
When unlocking the trunk
The system can be operated
when the electronic key is
within about 2.3 ft. (0.7 m) of
the trunk release button.
29
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■ Operation signals
A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors
have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)
■ Conditions affecting operation
The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations,
the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be
affected, preventing the smart key system and wireless remote control from
operating properly. (Ways of coping: →P. 448)
● When the electronic key battery is depleted
● Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-
play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-
cal noise
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other
wireless communication devices
● When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following
metallic objects
• Cards to which aluminum foil is attached
• Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside
• Metallic wallets or bags
• Coins
• Hand warmers made of metal
• Media such as CDs and DVDs
● When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity
● When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following
devices that emit radio waves
• Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio
waves
• Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs)
• Digital audio players
• Portable game systems
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
30
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Switching the door unlock function
It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
When the indicator on the key surface is off, press and
hold , , or for approximately 5 seconds while
pressing on the key.
The setting changes each time an operation is performed, as shown below.
(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at
least 5 seconds, and repeat step 2.)
■ Battery-saving function
In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to pre-
vent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.
● When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more
● When the electronic key has been left within approximately 6 ft. (2 m) of
the vehicle for 10 minutes or more
The system will resume operation when...
● The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control func-
tion. (→P. 36)
● The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the mechanical key. (→P. 448)
STEP
1
STEP
2
Unlocking doors Beep
Hold the driver's door handle to unlock
only the driver's door.
Exterior: Beeps three times
Interior: Pings once
Hold the front passenger's door han-
dle to unlock all doors.
Hold either front door handle to unlock
all doors.
Exterior: Beeps twice
Interior: Pings once
31
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■ Electronic key battery depletion
● The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years.
● The battery becomes depleted even if the electronic key is not used
because the key always receives radio waves. If the smart key system or
the wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detection
area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery
when necessary. (→P. 385)
● If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the
engine stops. (→P. 32)
● To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 3 ft.
(1 m) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field:
•TVs
• Personal computers
• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones
• Table lamps
■ To operate the system properly
Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get
the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from
the outside of the vehicle.
Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the
key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.
(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not func-
tion.)
■ Note for the smart key system
● Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection
areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases.
• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,
near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or
unlocked.
• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to
the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.
• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, package tray, floor, or in
the auxiliary box of the driver's side instrument panel or glove box
when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes
are changed.
32
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
● Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the
door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave
reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin
and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the
electronic key inside the vehicle.
● As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may
be locked or unlocked by anyone.
● Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to
start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.
● The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door
handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically
be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened
and closed.)
● Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.
● If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-
tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not
be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to
unlock the doors.)
● A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the
doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the
original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door
handle again.
■ When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods
To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft. (2
m) of the vehicle.
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ Alarms and warning indicators
A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning lights are
used to reduce the chance of vehicle theft and accidents resulting from erro-
neous operation.
● When any warning lights come on:
Take appropriate measures according to which warning light comes on.
(→P. 420)
33
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
● When an alarm sounds:
Take appropriate measures according to the following table.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
2 seconds
Tried to lock the doors
using the entry function
while the electronic key is
still inside the vehicle
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
vehicle and lock the
doors again.
Closed the trunk while the
electronic key is still inside
the trunk and all doors are
locked
Retrieve the elec-
tronic key from the
trunk and close the
trunk lid.
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
60 seconds
Tried to exit the vehicle
while the shift lever is in P
with the electronic key and
lock the doors using the
entry function without first
turning the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch OFF
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and lock the
doors again.
Exterior alarm
sounds once for
10 seconds
Tried to lock the vehicle
using the entry function
while a door is open
Close all of the doors
and lock the doors
again.
Interior alarm
sounds continu-
ously
Tried to open the door and
exit the vehicle without
shifting the shift lever to P
Shift the shift lever to
P.
Interior alarm
beeps repeatedly
Turned the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch to
ACCESSORY mode while
the driver's door is open
(Opened the driver's door
when the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is in
ACCESSORY mode.)
Turn the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch
OFF and close the
driver's door.
Turned the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch OFF
while the driver's door is
open
Close the driver's
door.
34
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ If the smart key system does not operate properly
● Locking and unlocking the doors and trunk: Use the mechanical key.
(→P. 448)
● Starting the engine: →P. 449
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted
→P. 385
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
It is possible to deactivate the smart key system, etc.
(Customizable features →P. 491)
■ Certification for the smart key system
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Alarm Situation Correction procedure
Interior alarm
sounds once
The electronic key battery
is low
Replace the battery.
(→P. 385)
35
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■ Caution regarding interference with electronic devices
● People with implanted pacemakers or cardiac defibrillators should keep
away from the smart key system antennas. (→P. 27)
The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary,
the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such
as the frequency of radio waves and timing of emitting the radio waves.
Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.
● User of any electrical medical device other than implanted pacemakers
and implanted cardiac defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the
device for information about its operation under the influence of radio
waves.
Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such
medical devices.
Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.
36
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Wireless remote control
∗
The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-
cle from outside the vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key system
Locks all doors
Unlocks doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
Sounds an alarm
(press and hold)
Vehicles without smart key system
Locks all doors
Sounds an alarm
(press and hold)
Unlocks doors
Pressing the button unlocks
the driver’s door. Pressing the
button again within 3 seconds
unlocks the other doors.
Unlocks the trunk
(press and hold)
∗: If equipped
37
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■ Operation signals
Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that
the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked:
Twice)
Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked.
■ Door lock buzzer
If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 10 seconds if
an attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer,
and lock the vehicle once more.
■ Panic mode
Vehicles with smart key system
Vehicles without smart key system
When is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the wireless remote control.
When is pressed for longer
than about one second, an alarm will
sound intermittently and the vehicle
lights will flash to deter any person from
trying to break into or damage your
vehicle.
To stop the alarm, press any button on
the wireless remote control.
38
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Key battery depletion
Vehicles with smart key system
→P. 31
Vehicles without smart key system
If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be
depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (→P. 386)
■ Security feature
If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is
unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.
■ When the electronic key battery is fully depleted (vehicles with smart
key system)
→P. 385
■ Conditions affecting operation
Vehicles with smart key system
→P. 29
Vehicles without smart key system
The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow-
ing situations.
● Near a TV tower, radio station, electric power plant, airport or other facil-
ity that generates strong radio waves
● When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu-
nication devices
● When multiple wireless keys are in the vicinity
● When the wireless key has come into contact with, or is covered by, a
metallic object
● When a wireless key (that emits radio waves) is being used nearby
● When the wireless key has been left near an electrical appliance such as
a personal computer
● When the wireless key battery is depleted
● If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to
the rear window
39
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. trunk unlocking function) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 491)
■ Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles with smart key sys-
tem)
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A.
FCC ID: NI4TMLF-2
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For vehicles sold in Canada
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
40
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles without smart key
system ⎯ type A)
FCC IDs: GQ4-29T
GQ4-36R
IC IDs: 1470A-10T
1470A-8R
MADE IN USA
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)
This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must
accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
■ Certification for wireless remote control (vehicles without smart key
system ⎯ type B)
FCC ID: HYQ12BBY
FCC ID: HYQ13BBZ
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
41
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Doors
The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,
wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.
■ Entry function (vehicles with smart key system)
→P. 25
■ Wireless remote control (if equipped)
→P. 36
■ Key
Vehicles with smart key system
The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical
key. (→P. 448)
Vehicles without smart key system
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
Vehicles with power door lock
system: Turning the key locks
and unlocks all doors. In the
driver’s door lock, turning the
key once unlocks the driver’s
door. Turning the key again
within 3 seconds unlocks the
other doors.
■ Door lock switch (if equipped)
Locks all doors
Unlocks all doors
42
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Rear door child-protector lock
The door cannot be opened from
inside the vehicle when the locks
are set.
Unlock
Lock
These locks can be set to prevent
children from opening the rear
doors. Push down on each rear
door switch to lock both rear
doors.
■ Inside lock button
Locks the door
Unlocks the door
The front doors can be opened
by pulling the inside handle
even if the lock buttons are in
the lock position.
43
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
Automatic door locking and unlocking systems (vehicles with
power door lock system)
The following functions can be set or cancelled:
*
1
: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only
*
2
: Vehicles with smart key system
Function Operation
Shift position linked
door locking function
*
1
Shifting the shift lever out of P locks all
doors.
Shift position linked
door unlocking func-
tion
*
1
Shifting the shift lever to P unlocks all doors.
Speed linked door lock-
ing function
*
2
All doors are locked when the vehicle speed is
approximately 12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
Driver's door linked door
unlocking function
Vehicles with smart key system
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door
is opened within 10 seconds after turning the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCES-
SORY mode or OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system
All doors are unlocked when the driver's door
is opened within 10 seconds after turning the
engine switch to “ACC” or “LOCK”.
44
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
■ Setting and canceling the functions
To switch between set and canceled, follow the procedure below:
Vehicles with smart key system: Close all the doors and
switch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode. (Perform step 2 within 10 seconds.)
Vehicles without smart key system: Close all the doors and
switch the engine switch to the “ON” position. (Perform step 2
within 10 seconds.)
Shift the shift lever to P or N, and
press and hold the driver's door
lock switch (
or ) for
approximately 5 seconds and
then release.
The shift lever and switch posi-
tions corresponding to the
desired function to be set are
shown as follows.
Use the same procedure to can-
cel the function.
STEP
1
STEP
2
45
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
*
1
: Vehicles with an automatic transmission only
*
2
: Vehicles with smart key system
When the setting or canceling operation is complete, all doors are
locked and then unlocked.
Function
Shift lever
position
Driver’s door lock
switch position
Shift position linked door lock-
ing function
*
1
P
Shift position linked door
unlocking function
*
1
Speed linked door locking func-
tion
*
2
N
Driver's door linked door unlock-
ing function
■ When all the doors are locked with the wireless remote control, entry
function or key
The doors cannot be unlocked with the door lock switch.
The door lock switch can be reset by unlocking all the doors with the wire-
less remote control, entry function or key.
■ The doors cannot be locked when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode, or the electronic key is left inside the vehicle.
Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be detected
correctly and the door may be locked.
Vehicles without smart key system
The key is in the engine switch and either of the front door is open.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 491)
46
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident
Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.
Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,
resulting in death or serious injury.
● Always use a seat belt.
● Always lock the doors.
● Ensure that all doors are properly closed.
● Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.
The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-
cle and it may result in serious injury or death.
Be especially careful for the front doors, as the doors may be opened even
if the inside lock buttons are in locked position.
● Set the rear door child protector locks when children are seated in the rear
seat.
47
1
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Before driving
Trunk
The trunk can be opened using the entry function, wireless remote
control, key or trunk opener.
■ Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle
Release the trunk lid.
■ Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle
Entry function (vehicles with smart key system)
→P. 25
Wireless remote control (if equipped)
→P. 36
Key (vehicles with smart key system)
The trunk can be opened using the mechanical key. (→P. 448)
Key (vehicles without smart key system)
Turn the master key clockwise
to release the trunk lid.
48
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
Trunk opener cancelling system
To protect luggage stored in the trunk against theft, do the following
procedure.
Turn the master key (vehicles
without smart key system) or
mechanical key (vehicles with
smart key system) counterclock-
wise to lock the trunk opener fea-
ture.
The trunk lid cannot be opened
even with the wireless remote
control or the entry function.
■ Internal trunk release lever
■ Which key to the vehicle is to leave with a parking attendant after the
trunk opener cancelling system is set
→P. 23
The trunk lid can be opened by pulling
down on the glow-in-the-dark lever
located on the inside of the trunk lid.
The lever will continue to glow for some
time after the trunk lid is closed.
49
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
● Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the
trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, caus-
ing an accident.
● Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.
If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-
gage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.
In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-
ous health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.
● Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a colli-
sion, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Do not allow children to enter the trunk.
If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could overheat or suffo-
cate.
● Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid.
Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the
child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.
50
1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk
CAUTION
■ Using the trunk
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri-
ous injury.
● Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before
opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to fall closed again
after it is opened.
● When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the
surrounding area is safe.
● If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that
the trunk is about to open or close.
● Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it
may move abruptly in strong wind.
● Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk
lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to fall closed
again after it is opened.
● The trunk lid may fall if it is not opened
fully. It is more difficult to open or close
the trunk lid on an incline than on a
level surface, so beware of the trunk lid
unexpectedly opening or closing by
itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully
open and secure before using the
trunk.
● When closing the trunk lid, take extra
care to prevent your fingers etc. from
being caught.
● When closing the trunk lid, make sure
to press it lightly on its outer surface.
51
1
Before driving
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Front seats
Power seat (driver's side only)
Seat position switch
Seatback angle switch
Seat cushion (front) angle switch
Vertical height adjustment switch
Lumbar support switch
52
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Active head restraints
When the occupant’s back
presses against the seatback
during a rear-end collision, the
head restraint moves slightly for-
ward to help reduce the risk of
whiplash on the seat occupant.
Manual seat
Seat position adjustment
lever
Seatback angle adjustment
lever
Vertical height adjustment
lever (driver’s side only)
53
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■ Active head restraints
Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to
move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may appear the head
restraint inner structure. These do not indicate problems.
CAUTION
■ Seat adjustment
● Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.
● Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion
to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.
If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply
restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may contact the
shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of
an accident.
● Manual seat only: After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is
locked in position.
Inner
structure
During
rear-end
collision
54
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Rear seats
■ Before folding down the rear seat
Stow the rear outside seat belt
buckles and move the rear
center seat belt buckle as
shown.
■ Folding down rear seatbacks
Pull the seatback lever in the
trunk for the seatback you
wish to fold down.
55
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■ After returning the seatback to the upright position
Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or
serious injury.
● Make sure the seatback is securely locked by pressing forward and rear-
ward on the top of the seatback.
● Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback.
NOTICE
■ When a rear seatback is folded down
● Make sure the luggage loaded in the enlarged trunk will not damage the
webbing of the rear center seat belt.
● Do not hold the seat by the seat belt comfort guide to prevent damage to
the rear seat.
56
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Head restraints
■ Removing the head restraints
Head restraints are provided for all seats.
Front seats
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Rear seats
Up
Pull the head restraints up.
Down
Push the head restraint down
while pushing the lock release
button.
Lock release button
Lock release buttons
Pull the head restraint up while pressing
the lock release button.
57
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■ Installing the head restraints
■ Adjusting the height of the head restraints
■ Adjusting the rear center seat head restraint
Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when
using.
CAUTION
■ Head restraint precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to
do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.
● Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.
● After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure
they are locked in position.
● Do not drive with the head restraints removed.
Align the head restraint with the installa-
tion holes and push it down to the lock
position.
Press and hold the lock release button
when lowering the head restraint.
Make sure that the head restraints are
adjusted so that the center of the head
restraint is closest to the top of your ears.
58
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Seat belts
Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-
ing the vehicle.
■ Correct use of the seat belts
● Extend the shoulder belt so
that it comes fully over the
shoulder, but does not
come into contact with the
neck or slide off the shoul-
der.
● Position the lap belt as low
as possible over the hips.
● Adjust the position of the
seatback. Sit up straight
and well back in the seat.
● Do not twist the seat belt.
■ Fastening and releasing the seat belt
Fastening the belt
Push the tab into the buckle
until a clicking sound is heard.
Releasing the belt
Press the release button.
Release button
59
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
Seat belt comfort guide (outside rear seats)
If the shoulder belt sits close to a person's neck, use the seat belt
comfort guide.
Pull out the comfort guide from
the pocket.
Slide the belt past the slot of the
guide.
The elastic cord must be behind
the seat belt.
■ Adjusting the height of the belt (front seats)
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor down while pressing
the release button.
Push the seat belt shoulder
anchor up.
Move the height adjuster up
and down as needed until you
hear a click.
STEP
1
STEP
2
60
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Buckle, position and release the
seat belt.
Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)
The pretensioner helps the seat
belt to quickly restrain the occu-
pant by retracting the seat belt
when the vehicle is subjected to
certain types of severe frontal
collision.
The pretensioner may not acti-
vate in the event of a minor frontal
impact, a side impact or a rear
impact.
STEP
3
61
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
■ Emergency locking retractor (ELR)
The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also
lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to
extend so that you can move around fully.
■ Automatic locking retractor (ALR)
When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then
retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be
extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly.
To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once
more. (→P. 107)
■ Pregnant women
■ People suffering illness
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.
Obtain medical advice and wear the seat
belt in the proper way. (→P. 58)
Women who are pregnant should position
the lap belt as low as possible over the
hips in the same manner as other occu-
pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-
pletely over the shoulder and position the
belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact
over the rounding of the abdominal area.
If the seat belt is not worn properly, not
only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus
could suffer death or serious injury as a
result of sudden braking or a collision.
62
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Child seat belt usage
The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult
size.
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 103)
● When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat
belt, follow the instructions on P. 58 regarding seat belt usage.
■ Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated
If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate
for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-
sions.
■ Seat belt extender
■ Rear outside seat belt
If your seat belts cannot be fastened
securely because they are not long
enough, a personalized seat belt
extender is available from your Toyota
dealer free of charge.
Use the seat belt after passing it through
the guide if the seat belt comes free from
the guide.
63
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of
sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
Failing to do so may cause death or severe injury.
■ Wearing a seat belt
● Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.
● Always wear a seat belt properly.
● Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt
for more than one person at once, including children.
● Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always
use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.
● Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seat-
ing position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting
up straight and well back in the seats.
● Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.
● Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.
■ Adjustable shoulder anchor
Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off
your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an
accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident. (→P. 59)
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
64
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
CAUTION
■ Seat belt pretensioners
● Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger's seat.
Doing so will disperse the passenger's weight, which prevents the sensor
from detecting the passenger's weight properly. As a result, the seat belt
pretensioner for the front passenger's seat may not activate in the event of
a collision.
● If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In
that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at
your Toyota dealer.
■ Seat belt damage and wear
● Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be
jammed in the door.
● Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose
parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat
belts cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.
If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota
dealer.
● Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been
involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.
● Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the
seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer.
Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating
properly resulting in death or serious injury.
● Always make sure the shoulder belt passes through the guide when using
the seat belt. Failure to properly position the belt may reduce the amount
of protection in an accident and could lead to serious injures in a collision
or sudden stop.
● Always make sure that the seat belt is not twisted, does not get caught in
the guide or the seatback and is arranged in the proper position.
65
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■ Using a seat belt comfort guide
● Make sure the belt is not twisted and that it lies flat. The elastic cord must
be behind the belt and the guide must be on the front.
● To reduce the chance of injury in case of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or
accident while driving, remove and store the comfort guide in its pocket
when it is not in use.
● Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of the
shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the neck, and should not fall
off the shoulder.
Failure to observe these precautions could reduce the effectiveness of the
seat belt in an accident, causing death or serious injury.
■ Using a seat belt extender
● Do not wear the seat belt extender if you can fasten the seat belt without
the extender.
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
because the belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, increas-
ing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident.
● The personalized extender may not be safe on another vehicle, when
used by another person, or at a different seating position other than the
one originally intended.
NOTICE
■ When using a seat belt extender
When releasing the seat belt, press on the buckle release button on the
extender, not on the seat belt.
This helps prevent damage to the vehicle interior and the extender itself.
66
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Steering wheel
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury.
The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.
Hold the steering wheel and
press the lever down.
Adjust to the ideal position by
moving the steering wheel
horizontally and vertically.
After adjustment, pull the lever
up to secure the steering
wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
67
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Glare from the headlights of vehicles behind can be reduced by
using the following functions.
Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror
Normal position
Anti-glare position
Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror
In automatic mode, sensors are used to detect the headlights of
vehicles behind and the reflected light is automatically reduced.
Turns automatic mode on/off
The indicator comes on when
automatic mode is turned on.
Vehicles with smart key sys-
tem: The mirror will revert to
the automatic mode each time
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is turned to IGNITION
ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key
system: The mirror will revert
to the automatic mode each
time the engine switch is
turned to the “ON” position.
68
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Adjusting the height of rear view mirror
Adjust the height of the rear view
mirror by moving it up and down.
■ To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view
mirror)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.
Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in
death or serious injury.
To ensure that the sensors operate prop-
erly, do not touch or cover them.
69
1
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
Before driving
Outside rear view mirrors
Folding back the mirrors
Push backward to fold the mir-
rors.
Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.
Select a mirror to adjust.
Left
Right
Adjust the mirror.
Up
Right
Down
Left
STEP
1
STEP
2
70
1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)
■ Mirror angle can be adjusted when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
■ When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror
defoggers)
Turn on the mirror defoggers to defog the mirrors. (→P. 219)
CAUTION
■ When driving the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while driving.
Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an acci-
dent, resulting in death or serious injury.
● Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.
● Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.
● Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be properly adjusted
before driving.
■ When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear
view mirror defoggers)
Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and
burn you.
71
1
Before driving
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
Power windows
∗
Lock switch
Press the switch down to lock
the passenger window switches.
Use this switch to prevent chil-
dren from accidentally opening or
closing a passenger window.
The power windows can be opened and closed using the following
switches.
Closing
Opening
One-touch opening (driver’s
window only)
*
*:Pressing the switch in the
opposite direction will stop win-
dow travel partway.
∗: If equipped
72
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
■ The power windows can be operated when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ Operating the power windows after turning the engine OFF
Vehicles with smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
to OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles without smart key system
The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. They cannot, how-
ever, be operated once either front door is opened.
CAUTION
■ Closing the windows
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body
in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the power windows.
Closing a power window on someone can cause serious injury, and in
some instances, even death.
73
1
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
Before driving
Moon roof
∗
Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up
and down.
■ Opening and closing
Open*
The moon roof stops slightly
before the fully open position
to reduce wind noise.
Press the switch again to fully
open the moon roof.
Close*
*: Push the switch in either direc-
tion to stop the moon roof part-
way.
■ Tilt up and down
Tilt up*
Tilt down*
*: Push the switch in either direc-
tion to stop the moon roof part-
way.
∗: If equipped
74
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
■ The moon roof can be operated when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ Operating the moon roof after turning the engine OFF
Vehicles with smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned
OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.
Vehicles without smart key system
The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds after the
engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position. It cannot, however,
be operated once either front door is opened.
■ Jam protection function
If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing
or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.
■ To reduce moon roof wind noise
When the moon roof is opened automatically, it will stop slightly before the
fully open position. Driving with the moon roof in this position can help
reduce wind noise.
■ Sunshade
The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade
will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.
75
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
1
Before driving
■ When the moon roof does not close normally
Perform the following procedure:
● If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.*
1
The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10
seconds.*
2
Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approxi-
mately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
● If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold the “TILT” switch*
1
until the moon roof moves into
the tilt up position and stops.
Release the “TILT” switch once and then press and hold the “TILT”
switch again.*
1
The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up
position.*
2
Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1
second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.
Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and
then release the switch.
*
1
: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will have to
be performed again from the beginning.
*
2
: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second pause,
automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press and hold the
“CLOSE” switch or press and hold the “TILT” switch. The moon roof will
tilt up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down, open
and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed
and then release the switch.
If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-
dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
76
1-4. Opening and closing the windows
CAUTION
■ Opening the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-
cle while it is moving.
● Do not sit on top of the moon roof.
■ Closing the moon roof
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bod-
ies in a position where it could be caught when the moon roof is being
operated.
● Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.
Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.
■ Jam protection function
● Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection
function intentionally.
● The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just
before the moon roof fully closes.
77
1
Before driving
1-5. Refueling
Opening the fuel tank cap
Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.
■ Before refueling the vehicle
Vehicles with smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that
all the doors and windows are closed.
Vehicles without smart key system
Turn the engine switch OFF and ensure that all the doors and
windows are closed.
■ Opening the fuel tank cap
Pull up the fuel filler door
opener.
Turn the fuel tank cap slowly
to open.
STEP
1
STEP
2
78
1-5. Refueling
Closing the fuel tank cap
When replacing the fuel tank
cap, turn it until a clicking sound
is heard.
After releasing your hand, the cap
will turn slightly to the opposite
direction.
Hang the fuel tank cap on the
back of the fuel filler door.
STEP
3
■ Fuel type
Unleaded gasoline (Octane rating 87 [Research Octane Number 91] or
higher)
■ Fuel tank capacity
13.2 gal. (50 L, 10.9 Imp. gal.)
79
1-5. Refueling
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■ Refueling the vehicle
Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.
Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static
electricity.
Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel
vapors to ignite.
● Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.
A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.
Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.
In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause
injury.
● Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their
bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.
● Do not inhale vaporized fuel.
Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.
● Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.
Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.
● Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically
charged.
This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition
hazard.
■ When replacing the fuel cap
Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your
vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in
death or serious injury.
80
1-5. Refueling
NOTICE
■ Refueling
Do not spill fuel during refueling.
Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust systems to
operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's
painted surface.
81
1
Before driving
1-6. Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system
The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the
engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in
the vehicle's on-board computer.
Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key sys-
tem
The indicator light flashes after
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch has been turned OFF
to indicate that the system is
operating.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch has been turned
to ACCESSORY or IGNITION
ON mode to indicate that the
system has been canceled.
Vehicles without smart key
system
The indicator light flashes after
the key has been removed
from the engine switch to indi-
cate that the system is operat-
ing.
The indicator light stops flash-
ing after the registered key
has been inserted into the
engine switch to indicate that
the system has been can-
celed.
82
1-6. Theft deterrent system
■ System maintenance
The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.
■ Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction
● If the key is in contact with a metallic object
● If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system
(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system (for vehicles sold in
U.S.A.)
Vehicles with smart key system
FCC ID: NI4TMIMB-1
Vehicles without smart key system
FCC ID: MOZRI-20BTY
FCC ID: MOZRI-33BTY
FCC ID: WRKRI-34BTY
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
■ Certifications for the engine immobilizer system (for vehicles sold in
Canada)
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not
cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, includ-
ing interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
83
1-6. Theft deterrent system
1
Before driving
NOTICE
■ To ensure the system operates correctly
Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper
operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.
84
1-7. Safety information
Correct driving posture
Drive in a good posture as follows:
Sit upright and well back in
the seat. (→P. 51)
Adjust the position of the
seat forward or backward to
ensure the pedals can be
reached and easily
depressed to the extent
required. (→P. 51)
Adjust the seatback so that
the controls are easily oper-
able.
Adjust the tilt and telescopic
positions of the steering
wheel downward so the air-
bag is facing your chest.
(→P. 66)
Lock the head restraint in
place with the center of the
head restraint closest to the
top of your ears. (→P. 56)
Wear the seat belt correctly.
(→P. 58)
85
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■ While driving
● Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat while driving.
Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
● Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.
A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce
the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of
death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.
● Do not place anything under the front seats.
Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat
tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-
dent. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.
■ Adjusting the seat position
● Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-
gers are not injured by the moving seat.
● Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid
injury.
Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.
86
1-7. Safety information
SRS airbags
The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain
types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the
occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the
risk of death or serious injury.
Front airbags
Driver airbag and front passenger airbag
Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-
senger from impact with interior components.
Side airbags and curtain shield airbags
Side airbags
Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.
Curtain shield airbags
Can help protect primarily the head of occupants in the outer
seats.
87
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Airbag system components
Front airbag sensors
Front passenger occupant
classification system (ECU
and sensors)
Door sensors
Front passenger airbag
Side airbags
Seat belt pretensioners and
force limiters
Side and curtain shield air-
bag sensors
Curtain shield airbags
“PASSENGER AIR BAG
ON” and “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” indicator
lights
SRS warning light
Front passenger’s seat belt
buckle switch
Airbag sensor assembly
Curtain shield airbag sen-
sors
Driver airbag
Driver’s seat belt buckle
switch
Driver’s seat position sen-
sor
88
1-7. Safety information
Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based
on the US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag
sensor assembly (ECU) controls airbag deployment based on infor-
mation obtained from the sensors etc. shown in the system compo-
nents diagram above. This information includes crash severity and
occupant information. As the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in
the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain
the motion of the occupants.
■ If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)
● Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying
(inflating) SRS airbag.
● A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.
● Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)
as well as the front seats, and parts of the front and rear pillars and roof
side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be
hot.
● The windshield may crack.
89
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (front airbags)
● The SRS front airbags will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds
the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approxi-
mately 12 - 18 mph [20 - 30 km/h] frontal collision with a fixed wall that
does not move or deform).
However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher if the vehicle
strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can move or
deform on impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an underride collision (e.g.
a collision in which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the
bed of a truck, etc.).
● Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt
pretensioners will activate.
● The SRS front passenger airbag will not activate if there is no passenger
sitting in the front passenger seat. However, the front passenger airbag
may deploy if luggage is put in the seat, even if the seat is unoccupied.
(→P. 98)
■ SRS airbag deployment conditions (side airbags and curtain shield air-
bags)
● The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the
event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force
corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 3300 lb.
[1500 kg] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpen-
dicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 12 - 18 mph
[20 - 30 km/h]). Depending on the conditions and type of accident, there
are times when the curtain shield airbags may deploy (inflate) in a front
impact.
● The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy in the event of a severe
frontal collision.
90
1-7. Safety information
■ Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other
than a collision
The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the
underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)
The SRS front airbags are generally not designed to inflate if the vehicle is
involved in a side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-
speed frontal collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes suffi-
cient forward deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front air-
bags may occur.
● Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or
hard surface
● Falling into or jumping over a deep hole
● Landing hard or vehicle falling
● Collision from the side
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
91
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■ Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS side airbags and cur-
tain shield airbags
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbag system may not activate if
the vehicle is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a col-
lision to the side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.
The SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags are not generally designed
to inflate if the vehicle is involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over,
or if it is involved in a low-speed side collision.
● Collision from the side to the vehicle
body other than the passenger com-
partment
● Collision from the side at an angle
● Collision from the front*
● Collision from the rear
● Vehicle rollover
*: Depending on the conditions and type
of accident, the curtain shield airbags
may deploy (inflate) upon frontal
impact.
92
1-7. Safety information
■ When to contact your Toyota dealer
In the following cases, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
● Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.
● The front of the vehicle is damaged or
deformed, or was involved in an acci-
dent that was not severe enough to
cause the SRS airbags to inflate.
● A portion of a door is damaged or
deformed, or the vehicle was involved
in an accident that was not severe
enough to cause the SRS side airbags
and curtain shield airbags to inflate.
● The pad section of the steering wheel
or dashboard (shaded in the illustration)
is scratched, cracked, or otherwise
damaged.
● The surface of the seats with the side
airbag is scratched, cracked, or other-
wise damaged.
● The portion of the front pillars, rear pil-
lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding)
containing the curtain shield airbags
inside is scratched, cracked or other-
wise damaged.
93
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the airbags.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts
properly.
The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.
● The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause
death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.
The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:
Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm)
of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro-
vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the
center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in.
(250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several
ways:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the
pedals comfortably.
• Slightly recline the back of the seat.
Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 10 in.
(250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, sim-
ply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of
your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm,
non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.
• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-
bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.
The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while
still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of
the instrument panel controls.
94
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and
can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very
close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-
bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits
upright.
● Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or
seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small
to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-
tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in
the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are
the safest for infants and children. (→P. 103)
● If the seat belt extender has been con-
nected to the front seat belt buckles but
the seat belt extender has not also
been fastened to the latch plate of the
seat belt, the SRS front airbags will
judge that the driver and front passen-
ger are wearing the seat belt even
though the seat belt has not been con-
nected. In this case, the SRS front air-
bags may not activate correctly in a
collision, resulting in death or serious
injury in the event of a collision. Be sure
to wear the seat belt with the seat belt
extender.
● Do not sit on the edge of the seat or
lean against the dashboard.
95
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not allow a child to stand in front of
the SRS front passenger airbag unit or
sit on the knees of a front passenger.
● Do not drive the vehicle while the driver
or passenger has items resting on their
knees.
● Do not lean against the door, the roof
side rail or the front, side and rear pil-
lars.
● Do not allow anyone to kneel on the
passenger seat toward the door or put
their head or hands outside the vehicle.
● Do not attach anything to or lean any-
thing against areas such as the dash-
board or steering wheel pad.
These items can become projectiles
when SRS driver and front passenger
airbags deploy.
96
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side
airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.
● Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-
bag components (→P. 87).
Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.
● Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-
bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.
● Do not attach anything to areas such as
the door, windshield glass, side door
glass, front and rear pillars, roof side
rail or assist grip.
● Do not hang coat hangers or other hard
objects on the coat hooks. All of these
items could become projectiles and
seriously injure or kill you, should the
SRS curtain shield airbag deploy.
97
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■ SRS airbag precautions
● If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a
door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do
so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.
● If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel
pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have
them replaced by your Toyota dealer.
■ Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components
Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications
without consulting your Toyota dealer.
The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing
death or serious injury.
● Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags.
● Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,
instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear
pillars or roof side rail.
● Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the
occupant compartment.
● Installation of snow plows, winches, etc. to the front grille (bull bars, kan-
garoo bar etc.).
● Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system.
● Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios or CD
players.
● Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.
98
1-7. Safety information
Front passenger occupant classification system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classifica-
tion system. This system detects the conditions of the front passen-
ger seat and activates or deactivates the devices for the front
passenger.
SRS warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” indicator light
Front passenger's seat belt reminder light
99
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Conditions and operation of the front passenger occupant classification system
■ Adult
*1
■ Child
*3
or child restraint system
*4
Indicator/
warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” and
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON”
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing
*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag
Activated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
Indicator/
warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” and
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG
OFF”
*5
SRS warning light Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Flashing
*2
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
ActivatedCurtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
100
1-7. Safety information
■ Unoccupied
■ There is a malfunction in the system
*1
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a
smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may rec-
ognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and pos-
ture.
*2
: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.
*3
: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system
sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/
her as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.
Indicator/
warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” and
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
Not illuminated
SRS warning light
Off
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
Activated
Curtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner Deactivated
Indicator/
warning light
“PASSENGER AIR BAG ON” and
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator lights
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
SRS warning light On
Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light Off
Devices
Front passenger airbag Deactivated
Side airbag on the front
passenger seats
ActivatedCurtain shield airbag in the front
passenger side
Front passenger’s seat belt pretensioner
101
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
*4
: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front pas-
senger seat. A forward-facing child restraint system should only
be installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable.
(→P. 103)
*5
: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual as for
installing the child restraint system properly. (→P. 107)
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
Observe the following precautions regarding the front passenger occupant
classification system.
Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.
● Wear the seat belt properly.
● Make sure the front passenger’s seat belt tab has not been left inserted
into the buckle before someone sits in the front passenger seat.
● Make sure the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is not illumi-
nated when using the seat belt extender for the front passenger seat. If the
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated, disconnect the
extender tongue from the seat belt buckle, then reconnect the seat belt.
Reconnect the seat belt extender after making sure the “PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON” indicator light is illuminated. If you use the seat belt
extender while the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-
nated, the SRS airbags for the passenger may not activate correctly,
which could cause death or serious injury in the event of a collision.
● Do not apply a heavy load to the front passenger seat or equipment (e.g.
seatback pocket).
● Do not put weight on the front passenger seat by putting your hands or
feet on the front passenger seat seatback from the rear passenger seat.
● Do not let a rear passenger lift the front passenger seat with their feet or
press on the seatback with their legs.
● Do not put objects under the front passenger seat.
102
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Front passenger occupant classification system precautions
● Do not recline the front passenger seatback so far that it touches a rear
seat. This may cause the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light to
be illuminated, which indicates that the passenger’s airbags will not deploy
in the event of a severe accident. If the seatback touches the rear seat,
return the seatback to a position where it does not touch the rear seat.
Keep the front passenger seatback as upright as possible when the vehi-
cle is moving. Reclining the seatback excessively may lessen the effec-
tiveness of the seat belt system.
● If an adult sits in the front passenger seat, the “PASSENGER AIR BAG
ON” indicator light is illuminated. If the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indi-
cator is illuminated, ask the passenger to sit up straight, well back in the
seat, feet on the floor, and with the seat belt worn correctly. If the
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator still remains illuminated, either
ask the passenger to move to the rear seat, or if that is not possible, move
the front passenger seat fully rearward.
● When it is unavoidable to install the forward-facing child restraint system
on the front passenger seat, install the child restraint system on the front
passenger seat in the proper order. (→P. 107)
● Do not modify or remove the front seats.
● Do not kick the front passenger seat or subject it to severe impact. Other-
wise, the SRS warning light may come on to indicate a malfunction of the
detection system. In this case, contact your Toyota dealer immediately.
● Child restraint systems installed on the rear seat should not contact the
front seatbacks.
● Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers
the seat cushion surface.
● Do not modify or replace the upholstery of the front seat.
103
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Child restraint systems
Points to remember
Studies have shown that installing a child restraint system on a rear
seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.
● Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is
appropriate to the age and size of the child.
● For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the
child restraint system.
General installation instructions are provided in this manual.
(→P. 107)
A child restraint system for a small child or baby must be properly
restrained on the seat with the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.
The laws of all 50 states of U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of
child restraint systems.
104
1-7. Safety information
Types of child restraints
Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types
according to the age and size of the child.
Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
Forward facing ⎯ Convertible seat
Booster seat
105
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
■ Selecting an appropriate child restraint system
● Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child
becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt.
● If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear
seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (→P. 58)
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child
must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system
depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is
not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be
crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.
● Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-
forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-
dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat
than in the front seat.
● Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger
seat even if the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illuminated.
In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front pas-
senger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-fac-
ing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.
● A forward-facing child restraint system may be allowed to be installed on
the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint sys-
tem that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passen-
ger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger
seat. Adjust the seatback as uprights as possible and always move the
seat as far back as possible even if the “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF”
indicator light is illuminated, because the front passenger airbag could
inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be
killed or seriously injured.
106
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ Child restraint precautions
● Do not use the seat belt extender when installing a child restraint system
on the front or rear passenger seat. If installing a child restraint system
with the seat belt extender connected to the seat belt, the seat belt will not
securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause death or seri-
ous injury to the child or other passengers in the event of a sudden stop,
sudden swerve or accident.
● Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body
against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side
rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy even if the
child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the side air-
bags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death
or serious injury to the child.
● Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by
the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If
it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child
in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
■ When children are in the vehicle
Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes
twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries
that could result in death.
If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used
to cut the belt.
■ When the child restraint system is not in use
● Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is
not in use.
Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compartment.
● If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the
vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring
passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
107
1
1-7. Safety information
Before driving
Installing child restraints
Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly
secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or
a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child
restraint.
The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is
not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil-
dren) system.
Seat belts equipped with a
child restraint locking mecha-
nism (ALR/ELR belts except
driver’s seat belt) (→P. 58)
Child restraint LATCH anchors
LATCH anchors are provided
for the outside rear seats. (But-
tons displaying the location of
the anchors are attached to the
seats.)
Anchor bracket (for top tether
strap)
Anchor brackets are provided
for all rear seats.
108
1-7. Safety information
Installation with LATCH system
Rear right seat only: Slide the
rear center seat belt to the side
to prevent it from getting pinched
in the lower anchorage.
Type A
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and
seatback slightly.
Latch the hooks of the
lower straps onto the
LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top
tether strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
A symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
STEP
1
Canada only
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
109
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Type B
Widen the gap between
the seat cushion and
seatback slightly.
Latch the buckles onto
the LATCH anchors.
If the child restraint has a
top tether strap, the top
tether strap should be
latched onto the top
tether strap anchors.
For owners in Canada:
A symbol on a child restraint sys-
tem indicates the presence of a
lower connector system.
Canada only
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
110
1-7. Safety information
Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)
■ Rear facing ⎯ Infant seat/convertible seat
Place the child seat on the rear
seat facing the rear of the vehi-
cle.
Run the seat belt through the
child seat and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that
the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder belt
and then allow it to retract
slightly in order to activate the
ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
111
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
While pushing the child seat
down into the rear seat, allow the
shoulder belt to retract until the
child seat is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
■ Forward facing ⎯ Convertible seat
Place the child seat on the seat
facing the front of the vehicle.
Run the seat belt through the
child seat and insert the plate
into the buckle. Make sure that
the belt is not twisted.
Fully extend the shoulder strap
and then allow it to retract
slightly into the ALR lock mode.
Lock mode allows the seat belt to
retract only.
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
112
1-7. Safety information
While pushing the child seat into
the rear seat, allow the shoulder
belt to retract until the child seat
is securely in place.
After the shoulder belt has
retracted to a point where there is
no slack in the belt, pull the belt to
check that it cannot be extended.
If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap
should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors.
■ Booster seat
Place the booster seat on the
seat facing the front of the vehi-
cle.
Sit the child in the booster seat.
Fit the seat belt to the booster
seat according to the manufac-
turer's instructions and insert the
plate into the buckle. Make sure
that the belt is not twisted.
Check that the shoulder belt is
correctly positioned over the
child's shoulder, and that the lap
belt is as low as possible.
(→P. 58)
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
113
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt
Push the release button and fully
retract the seat belt.
114
1-7. Safety information
Child restraint systems with a top tether strap
Outside
Secure the child restraint using a
seat belt or the lower anchors,
and remove the head restraint.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
Replace the head restraint.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
115
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
Center
Secure the child restraint using a
seat belt or the lower anchors,
and lock the head restraint in
place at the lowest position.
Open the anchor bracket cover,
latch the hook onto the anchor
bracket and tighten the top tether
strap.
Make sure the top tether strap is
securely latched.
STEP
1
STEP
2
■ Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages
The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2.
Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica-
tions can be used.
This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.
116
1-7. Safety information
CAUTION
■ When installing a booster seat
Do not fully extend the shoulder belt to prevent the belt from going to ALR
lock mode: (→P. 61)
ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only which could cause injury or dis-
comfort to the child.
■ When installing a child restraint system
Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual
and fix the child restraint system securely in place.
If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other
passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden
braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● If the driver's seat interferes with the
child restraint system and prevents it
from being attached correctly, attach
the child restraint system to the right-
hand rear seat.
● Adjust the front passenger seat so that
it does not interfere with the child
restraint system.
● Only put a forward-facing or booster
child seat on the front seat when
unavoidable. When installing a forward-
facing or booster child seat on the front
passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible even if the
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator
light is illuminated. Failing to do so may
result in death or serious injury if the
airbags deploy (inflate).
117
1-7. Safety information
1
Before driving
CAUTION
■ When installing a child restraint system
● When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is
positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be
kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's
shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event
of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
● Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not
twisted.
● Push and pull the child seat from side to side and forward to be sure it is
secure.
● After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat.
● Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system
manufacturer.
■ Do not use a seat belt extender
If a seat belt extender is used when installing a child restraint system, the
seat belt will not securely hold the child restraint system, which could cause
death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sud-
den braking, sudden swerving or an accident.
■ To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors
When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects
around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child
restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached,
or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the
event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.
118
1-7. Safety information
120
2-1. Driving procedures
Driving the vehicle
The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-
ing.
■ Starting the engine
→P. 131, 135
■ Driving
Automatic transmission
With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D.
(→P. 139)
Release the parking brake. (→P. 147)
Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the
accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
Manual transmission
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever to
1. (→P. 145)
Release the parking brake. (→P. 147)
Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently
depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.
■ Stopping
Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to P or N. (→P. 139)
Manual transmission
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, depress the brake
pedal.
If necessary, set the parking brake.
When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift
the shift lever to N. (→P. 145)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
121
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■ Parking the vehicle
Automatic transmission
With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal.
Set the parking brake. (→P. 147)
Shift the shift lever to P. (→P. 139)
When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF and stop the engine.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
to the “LOCK” position and stop the engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
Manual transmission
With the clutch pedal fully depressed, depress the brake
pedal.
Set the parking brake. (→P. 147)
Shift the shift lever to N. (→P. 145)
When parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R. If necessary,
block the wheels.
Turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position and stop the
engine.
Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your
person.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
122
2-1. Driving procedures
Starting on a steep uphill
Automatic transmission
Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to D.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
Release the parking brake.
Manual transmission
With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully
depressed, shift the shift lever to 1.
Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as
gradually releasing the clutch pedal.
Release the parking brake.
■ Driving in the rain
● Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the
windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.
● Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be
especially slippery.
● Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,
because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road
surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.
■ Engine speed while driving
In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.
This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation
to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.
● The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill
● When the accelerator pedal is released
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
123
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■ Breaking in your new Toyota
To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended
to observe:
● For the first 200 miles (300 km):
Avoid sudden stops.
● For the first 500 miles (800 km):
Do not tow a trailer.
● For the first 1000 miles (1600 km):
• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.
• Avoid sudden acceleration.
• Do not drive slowly with the manual transmission in a high gear.
• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.
■ Drum-in-disc type parking brake system (2.4 L 4-cylinder [2AZ-FE]
engine)
Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of
brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when-
ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota
dealer perform the bedding down.
■ Operating your vehicle in a foreign country
Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability
of the correct fuel. (→P. 468)
124
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine run-
ning. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-
erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.
• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake
pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident
that could result in death or serious injury.
• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-
culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.
• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the
vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator
pedals properly.
• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake
pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-
ing in an accident.
● Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.
The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may
cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.
● Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not let the vehicle roll back-
wards while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the
shift lever is in R. Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor
brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the
vehicle.
● If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and
check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can
cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious
health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immedi-
ately.
125
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
● On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not shift the shift lever to P
while the vehicle is moving.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Do not shift the shift lever to D (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or
1 (vehicles with a manual transmission) while the vehicle is moving back-
ward.
Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle
control.
● Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the
engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is
selected.
● During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off
while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the
power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to
steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it
is safe to do so.
However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible
to stop the vehicle in the normal way: →P. 461
● Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving
down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to
overheat and lose effectiveness. (→P. 141)
● When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking
brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing
an accident.
● Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or
outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of
vehicle control that can cause accidents that may result in death or serious
injury.
● Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their bod-
ies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.
126
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per-
mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high-
speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire
failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer
to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability
tires or not before driving at such speeds.
■ When driving on slippery road surfaces
● Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and
reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.
● Sudden changes in engine speed, such as engine braking caused by up-
shifting or down-shifting, may cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an
accident.
● After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make
sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent
the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet
and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in
an accident.
■ When shifting the shift lever (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
■ When the vehicle is stopped
● Do not race the engine. If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles
with an automatic transmission) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly
and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.
● Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.
If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space
and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.
● Vehicles with an automatic transmission: In order to prevent accidents due
to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while
the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.
● If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused
by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal
and securely apply the parking brake as needed.
127
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
CAUTION
● Avoid revving or racing the engine.
Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause
the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible
material is nearby.
■ When the vehicle is parked
● Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in
the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following.
• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a
fire.
• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and
plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.
• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the
interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-
cle's electrical components.
● Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (automatic trans-
mission vehicles), stop the engine and lock the vehicle.
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.
● Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately
after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns.
● Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it
is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is
running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead
to death or a serious health hazard.
■ Exhaust gases
Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and
odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health haz-
ard.
● If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed
area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.
This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.
128
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
● The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack
caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be
sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in
death or a serious health hazard.
■ When taking a nap in the vehicle
Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift
lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire
due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly
ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to
death or a serious health hazard.
■ When braking the vehicle
● When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously. Braking distance
increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one side of the vehicle
to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking brake may not
securely hold the vehicle.
● If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other
vehicles closely and avoid downhills or sharp turns that require braking.
In this case, braking is still possible, but it will require more force on the
pedal than usual. Braking distance may also increase.
● Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.
Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted
brakes.
● The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the
systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal
should be depressed more firmly than usual and braking distance
becomes longer.
Do not drive your vehicle with only a single brake system. Have your
brakes fixed immediately.
129
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
NOTICE
■ When driving the vehicle
● Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during
driving. If the brake pedal is depressed while driving with the accelerator
pedal depressed, driving torque may be restrained.
Manual transmission
● Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting,
do not release the clutch abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, tran-
saxle and gears.
● Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
Doing so may cause clutch trouble.
● Do not use any gears other than the first gear when starting off and mov-
ing forward.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
● Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill grade.
Doing so may damage the clutch.
● Do not shift into reverse when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so may
damage the clutch, transaxle and gears.
Automatic transmission
● Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake
pedals together to hold the vehicle on a hill.
■ When parking the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission)
Always put the shift lever in P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is acci-
dentally depressed.
■ Avoiding damage to vehicle parts
● Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for
an extended period of time.
Doing so may damage the power steering motor.
● When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid
damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.
130
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica-
tors)
Have the brake pads checked and replaced by your Toyota dealer as soon
as possible.
Rotor damage can result if the pads are not replaced when needed.
It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads
and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.
■ If you get a flat tire while driving
A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.
● It may be difficult to control your vehicle.
● The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.
● The vehicle will behave abnormally.
Replace a flat tire with a new one. (→P. 435)
■ When encountering flooded roads
Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may
cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.
● Engine stalling
● Short in electrical components
● Engine damage caused by water immersion
In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be
sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following.
● Brake function
● Changes in quantity and quality of engine oil, and transaxle fluid etc.
● Lubricant condition for the bearings and suspension joints (where possi-
ble) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.
131
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with smart key system)
Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic
key on your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START
STOP” switch modes.
■ Starting the engine
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green. If the
indicator does not turn green, the engine cannot be started.
Press the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch.
The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 25 seconds,
whichever is less. If you press
and hold the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch, the engine will
keep cranking for about 30
seconds maximum.
Continue depressing the brake
pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
The engine can be started
from any “ENGINE START
STOP” switch mode.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
132
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode
Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode
changes each time the switch is pressed.)
OFF*
The emergency flashers can
be used.
ACCESSORY mode
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
IGNITION ON mode
All electrical components can
be used.
The “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator turns amber.
*: If the shift lever is in a position
other than P when turning off
the engine, the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch will be
turned to ACCESSORY mode,
not to OFF.
133
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■ Steering lock release
■ If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 81)
■ When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber
The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer immediately.
■ Auto power OFF function
If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than an hour with the
shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn
OFF.
■ Key battery depletion
→P. 31
■ When the electronic key battery is discharged
→P. 385
■ Conditions affecting operation
→P. 29
■ Note for the entry function
→P. 31
Make sure that the steering wheel lock is
released.
To release the steering wheel lock, gently
turn the wheel left or right while pressing
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch.
If the steering wheel lock does not
release, the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch indicator will flash green.
134
2-1. Driving procedures
CAUTION
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Stopping the engine in an emergency
If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,
push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 3 seconds.
However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving
except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause
loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will
be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull
over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-
TION ON mode for long periods without the engine running.
■ When starting the engine
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
135
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without smart key system)
■ Starting the engine
Automatic transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in P.
Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position and start
the engine.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine: The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 25 seconds, whichever is less. If you turn the
engine switch, the engine will keep cranking for about 30 seconds
maximum.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
Manual transmission
Check that the parking brake is set.
Check that the shift lever is set in N.
Firmly depress the clutch pedal.
Turn the engine switch to the “START” position and start
the engine.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine: The engine will crank until it
starts or for up to 25 seconds, whichever is less. If you turn the
engine switch, the engine will keep cranking for about 30 seconds
maximum.
Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is com-
pletely started.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
136
2-1. Driving procedures
■ Turning the engine switch from “ACC” to “LOCK”
■ Changing engine switch position
“LOCK”
The steering wheel is locked
and the key can be removed.
(Vehicles with an automatic
transmission: The key can be
removed only when the shift
lever is in P.)
“ACC”
Some electrical components
such as the audio system can
be used.
“ON”
All electrical components can
be used.
“START”
For starting the engine.
Shift the shift lever to P (auto-
matic transmission) or N (man-
ual transmission).
(→P. 139, 145)
Push in the key and turn to the
“LOCK” position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
137
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■ Steering lock release
■ If the engine does not start
The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (→P. 81)
■ Key reminder buzzer
A buzzer sounds if the driver’s door is opened while the engine switch is in
the “LOCK” position to remind you to remove the key.
CAUTION
■ When starting the engine
Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the
accelerator while starting the engine under any circumstances.
Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.
■ Caution when driving
Do not turn the engine switch to the “LOCK” position while driving. If, in an
emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the
engine switch only to the “ACC” position.
When starting the engine, the engine
switch may seem stuck in the “LOCK”
position. To free it, turn the key while turn-
ing the steering wheel slightly in either
direction.
138
2-1. Driving procedures
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the key in the “ACC” or “ON” position for long periods if the
engine is not running.
■ When starting the engine
● 2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine: Do not crank for more than 30 seconds
at a time. This may overheat the starter and wiring systems.
● Do not race a cold engine.
● If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have the engine
checked immediately.
139
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Automatic transmission
∗
Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.
■ Shifting the shift lever
Standard type
Vehicles with smart key system: While the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, depress
the brake pedal and move the shift lever.
Vehicles without smart key system: While the engine switch
is in
the “ON” position, depress the brake pedal and move
the shift lever.
∗: If equipped
140
2-1. Driving procedures
Multi-mode type
While the engine switch is in
the “ON” position, depress the
brake pedal and move the shift lever.
141
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■ Shift position uses
*
1
: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable
for driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recom-
mended for normal driving.
*
2
: Selecting shift ranges using S mode restricts the upper limit of the
possible gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents
unnecessary upshifting.
Shift position
Function
Standard type Multi-mode type
P Parking the vehicle or starting the engine
R Reversing
N Neutral
D Normal driving
*
1
S
S mode driving
*
2
(→P. 142)
3
Position for engine
braking
2
Position for more
powerful engine braking
L
Position for maximum
engine braking
142
2-1. Driving procedures
Changing shift ranges in S mode (multi-mode type)
Shift the shift lever to the S position and operate the shift lever.
Upshifting
Downshifting
The initial shift range in S mode is set automatically to 5 or 4. How-
ever, the initial shift range may be set to 3 if AI-SHIFT has operated
while the shift lever was in the D position. (→P. 144)
When the shift range is 4 or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+”
sets the shift range to 5.
143
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
■ Shift ranges and their functions
A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking forces than a
higher shift range.
■ Downshifting restrictions (standard type)
The shift lever cannot be downshifted if the following speeds are exceeded.
mph (km/h)
■ Downshift restriction warning buzzer (multi-mode type ⎯ S mode)
To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may
sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be
possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will
sound twice.)
Shift range Function
5
A gear between 1 and 5 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
4
A gear between 1 and 4 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
3
A gear between 1 and 3 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
2
A gear between 1 and 2 is automatically selected
according to vehicle speed and driving conditions.
1 Setting the gear at 1.
Downshifting Maximum speed
3→2 59 (95)
2→L 28 (46)
144
2-1. Driving procedures
■ When driving with cruise control activated (if equipped)
Standard type
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling
engine braking, engine braking will not activate while downshifting to 3
because cruise control will not be canceled. (→P. 169)
Multi-mode type
Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling
engine braking, engine braking will not activate while driving in S mode and
downshifting to 4 because cruise control will not be canceled. (→P. 169)
■ If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P
→P. 446
■ If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever
to S (multi-mode type)
This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have
the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in D.)
■ AI-SHIFT
AI-SHIFT automatically selects the suitable gear according to driver perfor-
mance and driving conditions.
Standard type
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
Multi-mode type
AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D position.
(Shifting the shift lever to the S position cancels the function.)
145
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Manual transmission
∗
■ Maximum allowable speeds
Observe the following maximum allowable speeds in each gear when maxi-
mum acceleration is necessary.
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
mph (km/h)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
mph (km/h)
■ Shifting the shift lever
Fully depress the clutch pedal
before operating the shift
lever, and then release the
clutch pedal slowly.
Shift position Maximum speed
1 29 (48)
2 53 (85)
3 81 (130)
4 110 (178)
Shift position Maximum speed
1 33 (54)
2 56 (90)
3 81 (130)
∗: If equipped
146
2-1. Driving procedures
Turn signal lever
■ Turn signals can be operated when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in
the “ON” position.
■ If the indicators flash faster than usual
Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned
out.
Right turn
Left turn
Move and hold the lever
partway to signal a lane
change.
The right hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
Move and hold the lever
partway to signal a lane
change.
The left hand signal will flash
until you release the lever.
147
2-1. Driving procedures
2
When driving
Parking brake
■ Usage in winter time
See “Winter driving tips” for parking brake usage in winter time. (→P. 181)
NOTICE
■ Before driving
Fully release the parking brake.
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components
overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake
wear.
Sets the parking brake
Fully set the parking brake while depressing the brake pedal.
Releases the parking brake
Slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the but-
ton.
U.S.A. Canada
148
2-1. Driving procedures
Horn
■ After adjusting the steering wheel
Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.
The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.
(→P. 66)
To sound the horn, press on or
close to the mark.
149
2
When driving
2-2. Instrument cluster
Gauges and meters
Type A
Type B
150
2-2. Instrument cluster
Tachometer
Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.
Speedometer
Displays the vehicle speed.
Fuel gauge
Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.
Low fuel level warning light
→P. 422
Odometer/trip meter/instrument panel light control and trip meter
reset button
Switches between odometer and trip meter displays. Pressing and
holding the button will reset the trip meter when the trip meter is being
displayed.
To adjust the brightness of the instrument panel light, turn the button.
(→P. 151)
Odometer and trip meter display
Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the
meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and
display different distances independently.
Multi-information display
→P. 156
Display button
Switches the multi-information display.
Engine coolant temperature gauge
Displays the engine coolant temperature.
151
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
Instrument panel light control
The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.
Darker
Brighter
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the engine and its components
● Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which
indicates the maximum engine speed.
● The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is
in the red zone (H). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe
place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (
→P. 456)
152
2-2. Instrument cluster
Indicators and warning lights
The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and cen-
ter panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various sys-
tems.
■ Instrument cluster
Type A
Type B
153
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
■ Center panel
154
2-2. Instrument cluster
■ Indicators
The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the
vehicle’s various systems.
*
1
: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart key system) or
the engine switch is turned to
the “ON” position (vehicles without
smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not
come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer for details.
*
2
: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.
Turn signal indicator
(→P. 146)
(if equipped)
Front fog light indicator
(→P. 164)
Headlight high beam
indicator (→P. 161)
(if equipped)
Cruise control indicator
(→P. 169)
Slip indicator
(→P. 173)
(if equipped)
Cruise control set indi-
cator (→P. 169)
Engine immobilizer sys-
tem indicator (→P. 81)
VSC OFF indicator
(→P. 174)
“TRAC OFF” indicator
(→P. 174)
(vehicles with an automatic transmission)
*
1, 2
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON”
and
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
indicator
(→P. 98)
*
1
*
1
*
1
Shift position
indicators
(→P. 139)
155
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
CAUTION
■ If a safety system warning light does not come on
Should a safety system light such as the ABS or SRS airbag warning light
not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems
are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in
death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer
immediately if this occurs.
■ Warning lights
Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the
vehicle’s systems. (→P. 420)
*
1
: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is
turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with smart key system) or
the engine switch is turned to
the “ON” position (vehicles without
smart key system) to indicate that a system check is being per-
formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few
seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not
come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected
by your Toyota dealer for details.
*
2
: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
(
Canada
) (U.S.A.) (
Canada
) (U.S.A.) (
Canada
)
(U.S.A.) (U.S.A.) (U.S.A.) (if equipped) (Canada)
(on the
instrument
cluster)
(on the
center
panel)
(if equipped)
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
1
*
2
156
2-2. Instrument cluster
Multi-information display
Switch the display
Display items can be switched
by pressing the display button.
● Outside temperature
● Instantaneous fuel consumption
The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of
driving-related data, including the outside temperature.
● Outside temperature dis-
play
Indicates the outside tempera-
ture.
● Trip information
Displays driving range, fuel
consumption and other cruis-
ing-related information.
Displays the outside air temperature.
The temperature range that can be displayed is from
-40°F (-40°C) to 122°F (50°C).
Displays the instantaneous of fuel consumption.
157
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
● Average fuel consumption
● Driving range
Displays the average fuel consumption since the
function was reset.
• The function can be reset by pressing the display
button for longer than one second when the aver-
age fuel consumption is displayed.
• Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a
reference.
Displays the estimated maximum distance that
can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.
• This distance is computed based on your average
fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance
that can be driven may differ from that displayed.
• When only a small amount of fuel is added to the
tank, the display may not be updated.
Vehicles without smart key system
When refueling, turn the engine off. If the vehicle
is refueled without turning the engine off, the dis-
play may not be updated.
Vehicles with smart key system
When refueling, turn the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch OFF. If the vehicle is refueled without turn-
ing the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF, the
display may not be updated.
158
2-2. Instrument cluster
● Average vehicle speed
● Elapsed time
Displays the average vehicle speed since the
engine was started or since the function was
reset.
The function can be reset by pressing the display but-
ton for longer than one second when the average
vehicle speed is displayed.
Displays the elapsed time since the engine was
started or since the function was reset.
The function can be reset by pressing the display but-
ton for longer than one second when the elapsed time
is displayed.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The following information data will be reset.
● Average fuel consumption
● Driving range
● Average vehicle speed
● Elapsed time
■ Display
In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-
played, or the display may take longer than normal to change.
● When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 12 mph [20 km/h])
● When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/
exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)
159
2-2. Instrument cluster
2
When driving
NOTICE
■ The multi-information display at low temperatures
Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal
information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display
monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.
160
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Headlight switch
Type A
The daytime run-
ning lights turn on.
The side marker,
parking, tail, license
plate, daytime run-
ning lights and
instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and
all lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
161
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
Turning on the high beam headlights
With the headlights on, push
the lever forward to turn on the
high beams.
Pull the lever back to the center
position to turn the high beams
off.
Pull the lever toward you to
turn on the high beams.
Release the lever to turn them off.
You can flash the high beams
with the headlights on or off.
Type B
The daytime run-
ning lights turn on.
The side marker,
parking, tail, license
plate, daytime run-
ning lights and
instrument panel
lights turn on.
The headlights and
all lights listed above
(except daytime run-
ning lights) turn on.
162
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ Daytime running light system
● To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the headlights turn on
automatically whenever the engine is started and the parking brake is
released.
● Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system
offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help
improve fuel economy.
● Vehicles with daytime running light control sensor: The brightness of
headlights will automatically change depending on the darkness of the
surroundings. The other exterior lights and instrument panel lights auto-
matically turn on or off.
■ Daytime running light control sensor (if equipped)
■ Light reminder buzzer
Vehicles without smart key system
A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned OFF and the driver's door
is opened with the key removed from the engine switch while the lights are
turned on.
Vehicles with smart key system
A buzzer sounds when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned OFF or
to ACCESSORY mode and the driver's door is opened while the lights are
turned on.
The sensor may not function properly if
an object is placed on the sensor, or any-
thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to
the windshield.
Doing so interferes with the sensor
detecting the level of ambient light and
may cause the daytime running light sys-
tem to malfunction.
163
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-
ning.
164
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Fog light switch
∗
The fog lights improve visibility in difficult driving conditions, such
as in rain or fog. They can be turned on only when the headlights are
on low beam.
Type A
Off
Front fog lights on
∗: If equipped
165
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
Type B
Off
Front fog lights on
166
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
Windshield wipers and washer
Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation.
Type A
Intermittent wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
Low speed wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
High speed wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency*
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency*
*: The interval adjuster may not
be equipped depending on the
grade.
167
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
2
When driving
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
Type B
Intermittent wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
Low speed wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
High speed wind-
shield wiper opera-
tion
Temporary operation
Increases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency*
Decreases the intermittent
windshield wiper frequency*
*: The interval adjuster may not
be equipped depending on the
grade.
168
2-3. Operating the lights and wipers
■ The windshield wipers and washers can be operated when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
■ If no windshield washer fluid sprays
Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in
the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
NOTICE
■ When the windshield is dry
Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.
■ When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle
Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled
toward you and held continually.
■ When a nozzle becomes blocked
In this case, contact your Toyota dealer.
Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.
Wash/wipe operation
Wipers operate automatically.
169
2
When driving
2-4. Using other driving systems
Cruise control
∗
Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
Indicators
Cruise control switch
■ Setting the vehicle speed
Press the “ON-OFF” button to
activate the cruise control.
Cruise control indicator will
come on.
Press the button again to
deactivate the cruise control.
Accelerate or decelerate the
vehicle to the desired speed,
and push the lever down to set
the speed.
“SET” indicator will come on.
The vehicle speed at the
moment the lever is released
becomes the set speed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
∗: If equipped
170
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Adjusting the set speed
To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set
speed is obtained.
Increases the speed
Decreases the speed
Fine adjustment: Momentarily
move the lever in the desired
direction.
Large adjustment: Hold the
lever in the desired direction.
The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:
Fine adjustment: By approximately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the
lever is operated.
Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased con-
tinually until the lever is released.
171
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■ Cruise control can be set when
● Automatic transmission:
The shift lever is in the D or range 3 (standard type), or in the D or range
4 or higher of S has been selected (multi-mode type).
● Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
■ Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed
● The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set
speed resumes.
● Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be
increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then
pushing the lever down to set the new speed.
■ Canceling and resuming the constant speed control
Pulling the lever toward you
cancels the constant speed
control.
The speed setting is also can-
celed when the brakes are
applied or the clutch pedal
(manual transmission only) is
depressed.
Pushing the lever up
resumes the constant
speed control.
Resuming is available when
the vehicle speed is more
than approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h).
172
2-4. Using other driving systems
■ Automatic cruise control cancelation
Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following
situations.
● Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 10 mph (16 km/h)
below the preset vehicle speed.
At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.
● Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).
● VSC is activated.
■ If the cruise control indicator light flashes
Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press
the button again to reactivate the system.
If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels
immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise
control system. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■ To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake
Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.
■ Situations unsuitable for cruise control
Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.
Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting
in death or serious injury.
● In heavy traffic
● On roads with sharp bends
● On winding roads
● On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow
● On steep hills
Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.
● When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing
173
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
Driving assist systems
When VSC and TRAC are operating
If the vehicle is in danger of slip-
ping or the front wheels spin, the
indicator flashes to indicate that
VSC/TRAC have been engaged.
To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-
tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.
Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and
should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.
■ ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)
Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if
the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface.
■ Brake assist
Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is
depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.
■ VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)
Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning
on slippery road surfaces.
■ TRAC (Traction Control)
Maintains drive power and prevents the front wheels from spinning
when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.
■ EPS (Electric Power Steering)
Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn
the steering wheel.
174
2-4. Using other driving systems
To disable TRAC and/or VSC
If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, TRAC and VSC may
reduce power from the engine to the wheels. You may need to turn
the system off to enable you to rock the vehicle in order to free it.
■ Turning off TRAC
Quickly push and release the
switch to turn off TRAC.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light
should come on.
Push the switch again to turn the
system back on.
■ Turning off TRAC and VSC
Push and hold the switch while
the vehicle is stopped to turn off
TRAC and VSC.
The “TRAC OFF” indicator light
and VSC OFF indicator light
should come on.
Push the switch again to turn the
system back on.
■ Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC
Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF after
turning off the TRAC and VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.
■ Automatic TRAC reactivation
If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC system will turn on when
vehicle speed increases.
■ Automatic TRAC and VSC reactivation
If the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, the systems will not turn on
even when vehicle speed increases.
175
2-4. Using other driving systems
2
When driving
■ When the “TRAC OFF” indicator light comes on even if the VSC OFF
switch has not been pressed
TRAC cannot be operated. Contact your Toyota dealer.
■ Sounds and vibrations caused by ABS, brake assist, VSC and TRAC
● A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is
started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indi-
cate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.
● Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are
operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.
• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.
• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.
• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after ABS is activated.
• The brake pedal may move down slightly after ABS is activated.
■ If the slip indicator light comes on
There is a malfunction in the TRAC and VSC systems. Contact your Toyota
dealer and have your Toyota inspected.
■ EPS operation sound
When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may
be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.
■ Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system
The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from
overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of
time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur,
refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine
off. The EPS system should return to normal within 10 minutes.
CAUTION
■ ABS does not operate effectively when
● Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn
tires on a snow covered road).
● The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick
road.
176
2-4. Using other driving systems
CAUTION
■ Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor-
mal conditions
ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle's stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situ-
ations.
● When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads
● When driving with tire chains
● When driving over bumps in the road
● When driving over roads with potholes or uneven roads
■ TRAC may not operate effectively when
Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-
pery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating.
Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.
■ When VSC is activated
The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may
cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.
■ When TRAC and VSC are off
Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-
tions. As these are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do
not turn off TRAC and VSC unless necessary.
■ Replacing tires
Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total
load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recom-
mended tire pressure level.
The ABS and VSC system will not function correctly if different tires are fitted
on the vehicle.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or
wheels.
■ Handling of tires and suspension
Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect
the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.
177
2
When driving
2-5. Driving information
Cargo and luggage
Capacity and distribution
Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.
(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit⎯
(1)Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's
placard.
(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that
will be riding in your vehicle.
(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available
cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 × 150) =
650 lbs.)
(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being
loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Take notice of the following information about storage precau-
tions, cargo capacity and load.
● Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. Be sure
all items are secured in place.
● Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far for-
ward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.
● For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.
178
2-5. Driving information
(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
(→P. 185)
Example on your vehicle
Cargo capacity
Total load capacity
When 2 people with the combined weight of 366 lb. (166 kg) are
riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity of 825 lb. (370
kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be
as follows:
825 lb. - 366 lb. = 459 lb. (370 kg -166 kg = 204 kg)
In this condition, if 3 more passengers with the combined weight of
388 lb. (176 kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be
reduced as follows:
459 lb. - 388 lb. = 71 lb. (204 kg - 176 kg = 28 kg)
As shown in the above example, if the number of occupants
increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount
that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In
other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an
excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus
cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on
your vehicle.
179
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
■ Storage precautions
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.
● To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do
not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low,
as close to the floor as possible.
● Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for
passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts prop-
erly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or
serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving
or an accident.
● Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the
item may get under the clutch, brake or accelerator pedal and prevent
the pedals from being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or
hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident.
• Driver’s feet
• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)
• Package tray
• Instrument panel
• Dashboard
● Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and
injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci-
dent.
■ Capacity and distribution
● Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle
weight rating.
● Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less
than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly.
Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking con-
trol which may cause death or serious injury.
180
2-5. Driving information
Vehicle load limits
■ Total load capacity and seating capacity
These details are also described on the tire and loading information
label. (→P. 376)
CAUTION
■ Overloading the vehicle
Do not overload the vehicle.
It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and
braking ability, resulting in an accident.
Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity,
trailer weight rating and cargo capacity.
■ Total load capacity: 825 lb. (370 kg)
Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo
and luggage.
■ Seating capacity: 5 occupants (Front 2, Rear 3)
Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose
estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.
■ Trailer weight rating
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine: 1500 lb. (680 kg)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine: Toyota does not recommend
towing a trailer with your vehicle.
■ Cargo capacity
Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight
and the number of occupants.
181
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Winter driving tips
Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving
the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-
ate to the prevailing weather conditions.
■ Pre-winter preparations
● Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-
peratures.
• Engine oil
• Engine coolant
• Washer fluid
● Have a service technician inspect the level and specific grav-
ity of battery electrolyte.
● Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set
of tire chains for the front tires.
Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains
match the size of the tires.
■ Before driving the vehicle
Perform the following according to the driving conditions.
● Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is
frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.
Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.
● To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,
remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents
in front of the windshield.
● Remove any ice that has accumulated on the vehicle chassis.
● Periodically check for and remove any excess ice or snow
that may have accumulated in the wheel well or on the
brakes.
182
2-5. Driving information
Selecting tire chains
Vehicles with 15-inch tires
Use the tire chains of correct size and type.
Use SAE Class “S” type radial tire chains except radial cable chains or
V-bar type chains.
Vehicles with 16-inch and 17-inch tires
Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the snow chains.
Chain size is regulated for each tire size.
Side chain:
0.12 in. (3 mm) in diameter
0.39 in. (10 mm) in width
1.18 in. (30 mm) in length
Cross chain:
0.16 in. (4 mm) in diameter
0.55 in. (14 mm) in width
0.98 in. (25 mm) in length
■ When driving the vehicle
Accelerate the vehicle slowly and drive at a reduced speed suit-
able to road conditions.
■ When parking the vehicle
Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic trans-
mission), 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the park-
ing brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from
being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inad-
vertent sliding or creeping.
183
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Regulations on the use of snow chains
● Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to loca-
tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before install-
ing chains.
● Install the chains on the front tires.
● Retighten the chains after driving 1/4 - 1/2 mile (0.5 - 1.0 km).
■ Snow chain installation
Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.
● Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.
● Install tire chains on the front tires only. Do not install tire chains on rear
tires.
● Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying
manual.
184
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ Driving with snow tires
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or
serious injury.
● Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.
● Maintain the recommended level of air pressure.
● Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of
snow tires being used.
● Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.
■ Driving with tire chains
Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.
Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,
and may cause death or serious injury.
● Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being
used or 30 mph (50 km/h), whichever is lower.
● Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.
● Avoid sudden turns and braking, as use of chains may adversely affect
vehicle handling.
● Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-
trol is maintained.
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing snow tires
Request repairs of and obtain replacement snow tires from Toyota dealers or
legitimate tire retailers.
This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the opera-
tion of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.
■ Fitting tire chains
The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function correctly
when tire chains are fitted.
185
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Trailer towing (2.4 L 4-cylinder [2AZ-FE] engine)
Towing related terms
■ GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
combination weight. The gross
combination weight is the sum of
the total vehicle weight (including
the occupants, cargo and any
optional equipment installed on
the vehicle) and the weight of the
trailer being towed (including the
cargo in the trailer).
Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger-and-load-carrying
vehicle. Towing a trailer can have an adverse impact on handling,
performance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. For your
safety and the safety of others, you must not overload your vehicle
or trailer. You must also ensure that you are using appropriate tow-
ing equipment, that the towing equipment has been installed cor-
rectly and used properly, and that you employ the requisite driving
habits.
Vehicle-trailer stability and braking performance are affected by
trailer stability, brake performance and setting, trailer brakes, the
hitch and hitch systems (if equipped).
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in
accordance with your trailer’s characteristics and operating condi-
tions.
Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by
towing a trailer for commercial purposes.
Contact your Toyota dealer for further information about additional
requirements such as towing kits, etc.
186
2-5. Driving information
■ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
vehicle weight. The gross vehicle
weight is the total weight of the
vehicle. When towing a trailer, it
is the sum of the vehicle weight
(including the occupants, cargo
and any optional equipment
installed on the vehicle) and the
tongue weight.
■ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
axle weight. The gross axle
weight is the load placed on
each axle (front and rear).
Front GAWR
Rear GAWR
187
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
■ TWR (Trailer Weight Rating)
The maximum allowable gross
trailer weight. The gross trailer
weight is the sum of the trailer
weight and the weight of the
cargo in the trailer.
TWR is calculated assuming
base vehicle with one driver, one
front passenger, towing package
(if available), hitch and hitch sys-
tems (if required).
Additional optional equipment,
passengers and cargo in the vehi-
cle will reduce the trailer weight
rating so as not to exceed
GCWR, GVWR and GAWR.
■ Unbraked TWR (Unbraked Trailer Weight Rating)
The trailer weight rating for tow-
ing a trailer without a trailer ser-
vice brake system.
(With brakes)
(Without brakes)
188
2-5. Driving information
■ Tongue Weight
The load placed on the trailer
hitch ball. (→P. 190)
Weight limits
● The gross trailer weight must never exceed 1500 lbs (680 kg).
Automatic transmission
● The gross combination weight must never exceed 4797 lbs (2176
kg).
Manual transmission
● The gross combination weight must never exceed 4732 lbs (2146
kg).
● The gross vehicle weight must
never exceed the GVWR indi-
cated on the Certification
Label.
● The gross axle weight on each
axle must never exceed the
GAWR indicated on the Certi-
fication Label.
● If the gross trailer weight is over the unbraked TWR, trailer service
brakes are required.
189
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
GCWR, TWR and Unbraked TWR
Confirm that the gross trailer weight, gross combination weight, gross
vehicle weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight are all within the
limits.
■ GCWR
*
Automatic transmission
4797 lb. (2176 kg)
Manual transmission
4732 lb. (2146 kg)
■ TWR
*
1500 lb. (680 kg)
■ Unbraked TWR
*
1000 lb. (454 kg)
*: This model meets the tow-vehicle trailering requirement of SAE Interna-
tional per SAE J2807.
190
2-5. Driving information
Trailer Tongue Weight
● A recommended tongue weight varies in accordance with the types
of trailers or towing as described below.
● To ensure the recommended values shown below, the trailer must
be loaded by referring to the following instructions.
• Tongue Weight
The gross trailer weight should be distributed so that the tongue
weight is 9% to 11%. (Tongue weight /Gross trailer weight x 100
= 9% to 11%)
Gross trailer weight
Tongue weight
If using a weight distributing hitch when towing, return the front
axle to the same weight as before the trailer connection.
If front axle weight cannot be measured directly, measure the
front fender height above the front axle before connection.
Adjust weight distributing hitch torque until front fender is
returned to the same height as before connection.
The gross trailer weight, gross axle weight and tongue weight
can be measured with platform scales found at a highway
weighing station, building supply company, trucking company,
junk yard, etc.
191
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities. Toyota rec-
ommends the use of Toyota hitch/bracket for your vehicle. For details,
contact your Toyota dealer.
● If you wish to install a trailer hitch, contact your Toyota dealer.
● Use only a hitch that conforms to the gross trailer weight require-
ment of your vehicle.
● Follow the directions supplied by the hitch manufacturer.
● Lubricate the hitch ball with a light coating of grease.
● Remove the trailer hitch whenever you are not towing a trailer.
After removing the hitch, seal any mounting hole in the vehicle
body to prevent entry of any substances into the vehicle.
Positions for towing hitch receiver and hitch ball
Weight carrying ball position:
42.7 in. (1085.2 mm)
Hitch receiver pin hole posi-
tion: 36.4 in. (924.6 mm)
Connecting trailer lights
Please consult your dealer when installing trailer lights, as incorrect
installation may cause damage to the vehicle’s lights. Please take
care to comply with your state’s laws when installing trailer lights.
192
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing tips
Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. Help to avoid
an accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind when
towing:
● Speed limits for towing a trailer vary by state or province. Do not
exceed the posted towing speed limit.
● Toyota recommends that the vehicle-trailer speed limit is 65 mph
(104 km/h) on a flat, straight, dry road. Do not exceed this limit, the
posted towing speed limit or the speed limit for your trailer as set
forth in your trailer owner’s manual, whichever is lowest. Instability
of the towing vehicle-trailer combination (trailer sway) increases as
speed increases. Exceeding speed limits may cause loss of con-
trol.
● Before starting out, check the trailer lights, tires and the vehicle-
trailer connections. Recheck after driving a short distance.
● Practice turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer attached in
an area away from traffic until you become accustomed to the feel
of the vehicle-trailer combination.
● Reversing with a trailer attached is difficult and requires practice.
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel and move your hand to the
left to move the trailer to the left. Move your hand to the right to
move the trailer to the right. (This is generally opposite to reversing
without a trailer attached.) Avoid sharp or prolonged turning. Have
someone guide you when reversing to reduce the risk of an acci-
dent.
● As stopping distance is increased when towing a trailer, vehicle-to-
vehicle distance should be increased. For each 10 mph (16 km/h)
of speed, allow at least one vehicle and trailer length.
● Avoid sudden braking as you may skid, resulting in the trailer jack-
knifing and a loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet
or slippery surfaces.
193
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
● Avoid jerky starts or sudden acceleration.
● Avoid jerky steering and sharp turns, and slow down before mak-
ing a turn.
● Note that when making a turn, the trailer wheels will be closer than
the vehicle wheels to the inside of the turn. Compensate by making
a wider than normal turning radius.
● Slow down before making a turn, in cross winds, on wet or slippery
surfaces, etc.
Increasing vehicle speed can destabilize the trailer.
● Take care when passing other vehicles. Passing requires consider-
able distance. After passing a vehicle, do not forget the length of
your trailer, and be sure you have plenty of room before changing
lanes.
● Automatic transmission:
To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system perfor-
mance when using engine braking, do not put the transmission in
“D”. If in the S mode, the transmission shift gear position must be in
4 or lower.
● Manual transmission:
To maintain engine braking efficiency and charging system perfor-
mance when using engine braking, do not use fifth gear.
● Instability happens more frequently when descending steep or long
downhill grades. Before descending, slow down and downshift. Do
not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long down-
hill grades.
● Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the
brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and
result in reduced braking efficiency.
194
2-5. Driving information
● Due to the added load of the trailer, your vehicle’s engine may
overheat on hot days (at temperatures over 85°F [30°C]) when
driving up a long or steep grade. If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates overheating, immediately turn off the air condition-
ing (if in use), pull your vehicle off the road and stop in a safe spot.
(→P. 456)
● Always place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s and the
trailer’s wheels when parking. Apply the parking brake firmly, and
put the transmission in P (automatic transmission) or in 1 or R
(manual transmission). Avoid parking on a slope, but if unavoid-
able, do so only after performing the following:
Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
Have someone place wheel blocks under both the vehicle’s
and trailer’s wheels.
When the wheel blocks are in place, release the brakes slowly
until the blocks absorb the load.
Apply the parking brake firmly.
Shift into 1 or R (manual transmission) or P (automatic trans-
mission) and turn off the engine.
● When restarting after parking on a slope:
With the transmission in P (automatic transmission) or the
clutch pedal (manual transmission) depressed, start the
engine. On vehicles with an automatic transmission, be sure
to keep the brake pedal depressed.
Shift into a forward gear. If reversing, shift into R.
Release the parking brake (and also the brake pedal on vehi-
cles with an automatic transmission), and slowly pull or back
away from the wheel blocks. Stop and apply the brakes.
Have someone retrieve the blocks.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
195
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
■ Matching trailer ball height to trailer coupler height
■ Before towing
Check that the following conditions are met:
● Ensure that your vehicle’s tires are properly inflated. (→P. 474)
● Trailer tires are inflated according to the trailer manufacturer’s recom-
mendation.
● All trailer lights work as required by law.
● All lights work each time you connect them.
● The trailer ball is set at the proper height for the coupler on the trailer.
● The trailer is level when it is hitched.
Do not drive if the trailer is not level, and check for improper tongue
weight, overloading, worn suspension, or other possible causes.
● The trailer cargo is securely loaded.
● The rear view mirrors conform to all applicable federal, state/provincial or
local regulations. If they do not, install rear view mirrors appropriate for
towing purposes.
No matter which class of tow hitch
applies, for a more safe trailer hookup,
the trailer ball setup must be the proper
height for the coupler on the trailer.
Coupler
Trailer ball
196
2-5. Driving information
■ Break-in schedule
If your vehicle is new or equipped with any new power train components
(such as an engine, transmission, differential or wheel bearing), Toyota rec-
ommends that you do not tow a trailer until the vehicle has been driven for
over 500 miles (800 km).
After the vehicle has been driven for over 500 miles (800 km), you can start
towing. However, for the next 500 miles (800 km), drive the vehicle at a
speed of less than 50 mph (80 km/h) when towing a trailer, and avoid full
throttle acceleration.
■ Maintenance
● If you tow a trailer, your vehicle will require more frequent maintenance
due to the additional load. (See “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or
“Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
● Retighten the fixing bolts of the towing ball and bracket after approxi-
mately 600 miles (1000 km) of trailer towing.
197
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
■ If trailer sway occurs
One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can
adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.
● If trailer swaying occurs:
• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.
Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.
• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to
reduce speed.
Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.
If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle
and trailer should stabilize.
● After the trailer swaying has stopped:
• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.
• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.
• Check the load in the trailer.
Make sure the load has not shifted.
Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.
• Check the load in the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.
If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred
is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.
Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the
towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.
CAUTION
■ Trailer towing precautions
To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in accordance
with the trailer’s characteristics and operating conditions. Failure to do so
could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Vehicle stability
and braking performance are affected by trailer stability, brake setting and
performance, and the hitch. Your vehicle will handle differently when towing
a trailer.
198
2-5. Driving information
CAUTION
■ To avoid accident or injury
● Do not exceed the TWR, unbraked TWR, GCWR, GVWR or GAWR.
● Adjust the tongue weight within the appropriate range. Place heavier loads
as close to the trailer axle as possible.
● Do not exceed 65 mph (104 km/h), the posted towing speed limit or the
speed limit for your trailer as set forth in your trailer owner’s manual,
whichever is lowest. Slow down sufficiently before making a turn, in cross
winds, on wet or slippery surface, etc. to help avoid an accident. If you
experience a vehicle-trailer instability from reducing a certain speed, slow
down and make sure you keep your vehicle speed under the speed of
which you experience the instability.
● Do not make jerky, abrupt or sharp turns.
● Do not apply the brakes suddenly as you may skid, resulting in jackknifing
and loss of vehicle control. This is especially true on wet or slippery sur-
faces.
● Do not exceed the trailer hitch assembly weight, gross vehicle weight,
gross axle weight and trailer tongue weight capacities.
● Do not use cruise control when towing.
● Slow down and downshift before descending steep or long downhill
grades. Do not make sudden downshifts while descending steep or long
downhill grades.
● Vehicle-trailer instability is more likely on steep long downhills. Before
descending steep or long downhill grades, slow down and downshift. Do
not make sudden downshifts when descending steep or long downhill
grades. Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long or applying the
brakes too frequently. This could cause the brakes to overheat and result
in reduced braking efficiency.
● Do not tow a trailer when the compact spare tire is installed on your vehi-
cle.
199
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
CAUTION
■ Hitch
Trailer hitch assemblies have different weight capacities established by the
hitch manufacturer. Even though the vehicle may be physically capable of
towing a higher weight, the operator must determine the maximum weight
rating of the particular hitch assembly and never exceed the maximum
weight rating specified for the trailer-hitch. Exceeding the maximum weight
rating set by the trailer-hitch manufacturer can cause an accident resulting in
death or serious personal injuries.
■ When towing a trailer
Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to any applicable fed-
eral and state/provincial regulations.
● If the gross trailer weight exceeds unbraked TWR, trailer brakes are
required. Toyota recommends trailers with brakes that conform to all appli-
cable federal and state/provincial regulations.
● Never tap into your vehicle’s hydraulic system, as this will lower the vehi-
cle’s braking effectiveness.
● Never tow a trailer without using a safety chain securely attached to both
the trailer and the vehicle. If damage occurs to the coupling unit or hitch
ball, there is danger of the trailer wandering into another lane.
NOTICE
■ When installing a trailer hitch
Use only the position recommended by your Toyota dealer. Do not install the
trailer hitch on the bumper; this may cause body damage.
■ Do not directly splice trailer lights
Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage
your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.
200
2-5. Driving information
Trailer towing (1.8 L 4-cylinder [2ZR-FE] engine)
Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.
Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or
the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc.
Your Toyota is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow
hitch mounted carriers.
201
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
Dinghy towing (automatic transmission)
NOTICE
■ To avoid serious damage to your vehicle
Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.
Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on
the ground) behind a motor home.
202
2-5. Driving information
Dinghy towing (manual transmission)
Towing your vehicle with 4 wheels on the ground
To prevent damage to your vehicle, perform the following procedures
before towing.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Switch to the “ACC” position. (→P. 135)
Ensure that the audio system and other powered devices have been
turned off.
Release the parking brake.
After towing, leave the engine in idle for at least 3 minutes before
driving the vehicle.
■ Necessary equipment and accessories
Specialized equipment and accessories are required for dinghy towing. Con-
tact the service branch of the motor home manufacturer regarding recom-
mended equipment.
Your vehicle can be dinghy towed in a forward direction (with 4
wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
203
2-5. Driving information
2
When driving
NOTICE
■ Dinghy towing direction
■ To prevent the steering from locking
Ensure the engine switch is in the “ACC” position.
Do not tow the vehicle backwards.
Doing so may cause serious damage.
206
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Automatic air conditioning system
∗
Using the automatic mode
Press .
The air conditioning system will begin to operate.
Press “∧” to increase the temperature and “∨” to decrease the
temperature on .
Air outlets and fan speed are automatically adjusted according to the
temperature setting.
Fan speed display
Windshield defogger Temperature control
Air intake mode switch
Fan speed
Temperature setting display
OFF
Automatic mode
Changes the air outlets used
Air outlet display
Air conditioning
ON/OFF switch
STEP
1
STEP
2
∗: If equipped
207
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting
Press “∧” to increase the temperature and “∨” to decrease the tem-
perature on .
■ Adjusting the fan speed
Press “∧” (increase) or “∨” (decrease) on .
The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)
Press to turn the fan off.
■ Changing the air outlets
Press .
The air outlets switch each time is pressed. The air flow
shown on the display indicates the following.
Air flows to the upper body.
208
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
: Some models
Mainly air flows to the feet.
: Some models
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
Recirculated air mode will auto-
matically switch to outside air
mode.
: Some models
■ Switching air intake modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-
lated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.
209
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Defogging the windshield
Defogging
The air conditioning system oper-
ates automatically.
Recirculated air mode will auto-
matically switch to outside air
mode. It is not possible to return
to recirculated air mode when the
switch is on.
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob right to open the
vent and left to close the vent.
210
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Using the automatic mode
Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature set-
ting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.
● Immediately after
is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until
warm or cool air is ready to flow.
● Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is
on.
■ Using the recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for
an extended period.
■ Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes
Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched to
in accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.
■ Window defogger feature
Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situa-
tions where the windows need to be defogged.
■ When outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
is pressed.
■ When
is selected for the air outlets used
For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flow-
ing to the upper body depending on the temperature setting.
211
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■ Air conditioning odors
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time
immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic
mode.
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.
The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the
windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking
your vision.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
212
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Manual air conditioning system
∗
Heater
Fan speed control dial
Air outlet selection dial
Air intake mode switch
Temperature control dial
∗: If equipped
213
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Adjusting the settings
■ Adjusting the temperature setting (heater)
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise to increase the temper-
ature.
■ Adjusting the temperature setting (air conditioning system)
Turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counter-
clockwise (cool).
If is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air or
heated air.
Air conditioning system
Fan speed control dial
Air outlet selection dial
Air intake mode switch
Air conditioning ON/OFF switch
Temperature control dial
214
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
■ Adjusting the fan speed
Turn the fan speed control dial clockwise (increase) or counter-
clockwise (decrease).
Set the dial to “0” to turn the fan off.
■ Selecting the air outlets
Set the air outlet selection dial to an appropriate position.
The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can also be
selected for more detailed adjustment.
Air flows to the upper body.
Air flows to the upper body and
feet.
: Some models
215
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Mainly air flows to the feet.
: Some models
Air flows to the feet and the
windshield defogger operates.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recircu-
lated air mode when the switch is
on.
: Some models
Air flows to the windshield and
side windows.
The air intake is automatically
switched to outside air mode. It is
not possible to return to recircu-
lated air mode when the switch is
on.
■ Switching air intake modes
Press .
The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-
lated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.
216
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
Adjusting the position of and opening and closing the air outlets
Center outlets
Direct air flow to the left or right,
up or down.
Right and left side outlets
Direct air flow to the left or
right, up or down.
Turn the knob right to open the
vent and left to close the vent.
217
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
■ For quick cooling (vehicles with air conditioning system)
Turn the temperature control dial to the “MAX A/C” position and select the
recirculated air mode.
■ For quick clearing of the windshield and side windows (vehicles with
air conditioning system)
Press to turn the air conditioning on.
■ Using the recirculated air mode
The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for
an extended period.
■ When outside air temperature approaches 32°F (0°C) (vehicles with air
conditioning system)
The air conditioning system may not operate even when
is pressed.
■ When
is selected for the air outlets used
For your driving comfort, air flowing to the feet may be warmer than air flow-
ing to the upper body depending on the position of the temperature adjust-
ment dial.
■ Air conditioning odors
● During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter
into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause
odor to be emitted from the vents.
● To reduce potential odors from occurring:
It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air
mode prior to turning the vehicle off.
218
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
CAUTION
■ To prevent the windshield from fogging up
Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in
extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the
outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the
windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the
engine is stopped.
219
3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger
3
Interior features
Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers
■ Outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)
Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror
defoggers on.
CAUTION
■ Outside rear view mirror defoggers (if equipped)
The surfaces of the outside rear view mirrors become hot. Do not touch
them to prevent from burning yourself.
Clear the rear window using the defogger.
Vehicles with automatic air conditioning system
On/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
Vehicles with manual air conditioning system
On/off
The defoggers will automati-
cally turn off after approxi-
mately 15 minutes.
220
3-2. Using the audio system
Audio system types
Without Display Audio system
Type A: CD player and AM/FM radio
Type B: CD player and AM/FM radio
221
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
With Display Audio system
Owners of models equipped with a Display Audio system should
refer to the “Display Audio System Owner's Manual”.
Title Page
Using the radio P. 232
Using the CD player P. 236
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 243
Operating an iPod P. 252
Operating a USB memory P. 261
Optimal use of the audio system P. 269
Using the AUX port P. 273
Using the steering wheel audio switches P. 275
222
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Using cellular phones
Interference may be heard through the audio system's speakers if a cellular
phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is
operating.
■ About Bluetooth
®
The Bluetooth wordmark and logo are owned by Bluetooth SIG. and permis-
sion has been granted to use the trademark of the licensee Panasonic
Corporation. Other trademarks and trade names are owned by various dif-
ferent owners.
223
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ U.S.A. and Canada (type A: without Display Audio system)
● Part 15 of the FCC Rules
FCC Warning:
Any unauthorized changes or modifications to this equipment will void the
user’s authority to operate this device.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very
low levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum per-
missive exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be
installed and operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away
from person’s body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
● Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information
from the surface of compact discs.
The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet.
Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts
since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation expo-
sure.
• The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye haz-
ard.
224
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
■ U.S.A. (type B: without Display Audio system)
FCC ID: ACJ932PTA184
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Expo-
sure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65. This equipment has very low
levels of RF energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive
exposure evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and
operated keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's
body (excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
● Laser products
• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to make any changes yourself.
This is an intricate unit that uses a laser pickup to retrieve information
from the surface of compact discs.
The laser is carefully shielded so that its rays remain inside the cabinet.
Therefore, never try to disassemble the player or alter any of its parts
since you may be exposed to laser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser.
Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other
than those specified herein may result in hazardous radiation expo-
sure.
• The use of optical instruments with this product will increase eye haz-
ard.
225
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ Canada (type B: without Display Audio system)
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS
standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables
aux appareils radio exempts de licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes : (1) l’appareil ne
doit pas produire de brouillage, et (2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter
tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible
d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Under Industry Canada regulations, this radio transmitter may only operate
using an antenna of a type and maximum (or lesser) gain approved for the
transmitter by Industry Canada. To reduce potential radio interference to
other users, the antenna type and its gain should be so chosen that the
equivalent isotropically radiated power (e.i.r.p.) is not more than that neces-
sary for successful communication.
Conformément à la réglementation d’Industrie Canada, le présent émetteur
radio peut fonctionner avec une antenne d’un type et d’un gain maximal (ou
inférieur) approuvé pour l’émetteur par Industrie Canada. Dans le but de
réduire les risques de brouillage radioélectrique à l’intention des autres
utilisateurs, il faut choisir le type d’antenne et son gain de sorte que la
puissance isotrope rayonnée équivalente (p.i.r.e.) ne dépasse pas l’intensité
nécessaire à l’établissement d’une communication satisfaisante.
226
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
This equipment complies with IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an
uncontrolled environment and meets RSS-102 of the IC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF energy that it
deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure evaluation
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated keeping the
radiator at least 20cm or more away from person's body (excluding extremi-
ties: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements
énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles
d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques (RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet
équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui est considérée conforme
sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale autorisée.
Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant une
distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à
l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
227
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ U.S.A. (with Display Audio system)
FCC ID: AJDK032
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of this device.
The antenna for Bluetooth cannot be removed (or replaced) by user.
This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
FCC Warning:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Expo-
sure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio fre-
quency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated
keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
228
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-
its are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communica-
tions. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
229
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
■ Canada (with Display Audio system)
IC ID: 775E-K032
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry Canada
licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of this device.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux la partie 15 des règles de la FCC et
CNR d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
licence.
L’exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
(1) l’appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
(2) l’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,
même si le brouillage est susceptible d’en compromettre le
fonctionnement.
The antenna for Bluetooth cannot be removed (or replaced) by user.
L’antenne de Bluetooth ne peut pas être supprimé (ou remplacé) par
l’utilisateur.
This device complies with RSS-310 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject
to the condition that this device does not cause harmful interference.
Cet appareil est conforme au CNR-310 d’Industrie Canada. Son exploitation
est autorisée sous réserve que l’appareil ne cause pas de brouillage
préjudiciable.
230
3-2. Using the audio system
CAUTION
FCC Warning:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment complies with FCC/IC radiation exposure limits set forth for
an uncontrolled environment and meets the FCC radio frequency (RF) Expo-
sure Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the IC radio fre-
quency (RF) Exposure rules. This equipment has very low levels of RF
energy that it deemed to comply without maximum permissive exposure
evaluation (MPE). But it is desirable that it should be installed and operated
keeping the radiator at least 20cm or more away from person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
Cet équipement est conforme aux limites d’exposition aux rayonnements
énoncées pour un environnement non contrôlé et respecte les règles les
radioélectriques (RF) de la FCC lignes directrices d'exposition dans le
Supplément C à OET65 et d’exposition aux fréquences radioélectriques
(RF) CNR-102 de l’IC. Cet équipement émet une énergie RF très faible qui
est considérée conforme sans évaluation de l’exposition maximale
autorisée. Cependant, cet équipement doit être installé et utilisé en gardant
une distance de 20 cm ou plus entre le dispositif rayonnant et le corps (à
l’exception des extrémités : mains, poignets, pieds et chevilles).
NOTE: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These lim-
its are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-
ence in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance
with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communica-
tions. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
231
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
CAUTION
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the
following measures:
- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This transmitter must not be co-located or operated in conjunction with any
other antenna or transmitter.
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary when the engine is
off.
■ To avoid damaging the audio system
Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.
232
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the radio
Type A
Type B
Volume
Seeking the frequency
Station selector
AM/FM mode buttons
Adjusting the frequency
Power
Scanning for receivable stations
Displays text message
Power Volume
Adjusting the
frequency or
selecting items
Seeking
the frequency
AM/FM mode buttonScanning for
receivable stations
Station selector
Displays text message
233
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Setting station presets
Type A
Search for desired stations by turning or pressing “
∧”
or “∨” on .
Press and hold a button (from to ) until you hear
a beep.
Type B
Search for desired stations by turning or pressing “
∧”
or “∨” on .
Press and hold a button (from to ) until you hear
a beep.
Scanning radio stations
■ Scanning the preset radio stations
Press and hold or until you hear a beep.
Preset stations will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press or
once again.
■ Scanning all radio stations within range
Press or .
All stations with reception will be played for 5 seconds each.
When the desired station is reached, press or
once again.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
234
3-2. Using the audio system
Switching the display
Type A
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Title (song/program title) → Name (artist name/feature)/Title (song/pro-
gram title).
Type B
Press .
If the text continues past the end of the display, “ ” is displayed. Press
.
■ When the battery is disconnected (type A)
All preset stations are erased.
■ Reception sensitivity
● Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the con-
tinually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength
and surrounding objects, such as trains and transmitters.
● The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear window. To maintain clear
radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other metallic
objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear window.
235
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■ Certifications for the radio tuner
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. How-
ever, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular
installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the
user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by trying one or more of
the following:
● Reorienting or relocating the receiving antenna.
● Increasing the separation between the equipment and receiver.
● Connecting the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to
which the receiver is connected.
● Consulting the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
236
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the CD player
Type A
Type B
Volume
Random playback
Repeat play
Playback
Power
CD eject
Displays text message
Search playback
Selecting a track,
fast-forwarding
and rewinding
Power Volume
Search playback
CD eject
Displays text message
Playback
Selecting a
track or displays
track list
Repeat play
Random playback
Selecting a
track
Reverse
Fast-forward
237
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Loading CDs
Insert a CD.
Ejecting CDs
Press or and remove the CD.
Selecting a track
Type A
Press “
∧” to move up or “∨” to move down using until the
desired track number is displayed.
Type B
Turn or press “
∧” to move up or “∨” to move down using
until the desired track number is displayed.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
Type A
To fast-forward or reverse, press and hold “
∧” or “∨” on .
Type B
To fast-forward or reverse, press ( ) or
().
238
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a track from a track list (type B)
Press .
The track list will be displayed.
Turn and press to select a track.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
Scanning tracks
Press or .
The first ten seconds of each track will be played.
Press or again when the desired track is
reached.
Random playback
■ Current CD
Press (RAND) or (RDM).
To cancel, press the button once more.
Repeat play
Press (RPT) or (RPT).
To cancel, press the button once more.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
239
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Switching the display
Type A
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Track no./Elapsed time → CD title → Track name.
Type B
Press .
Track title, Artist name and Disc title are shown on the display.
To return to the previous display, press or (BACK).
■ Display
Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.
If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding or
for 1 second or more will display the remaining characters.
A maximum of 24 (type A) or 64 (type B) characters can be displayed.
If or is pressed for 1 second or more again, or has not
been pressed for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12
characters.
Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed
properly or may not be displayed at all.
240
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Error messages
“ERROR” (type B): This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the
player.
“CD CHECK”: The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT”: Operation has stopped due to a high tempera-
ture inside the player. Wait for a while and then
press or . If the CD still
cannot be played back, contact your Toyota
dealer.
■ Discs that can be used
Discs with the marks shown below can be used.
Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-
tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.
CDs with copy-protect features may not be used.
■ CD player protection feature
To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when
a problem is detected while the CD player is being used.
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.
■ Lens cleaners
Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.
241
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
Do not use the following types of CDs, 3 in. (8 cm) CD adapters or Dual
Discs.
Doing so may damage the CD player and/or the CD insert/eject function.
● CDs that have a diameter that is not 4.7
in. (12 cm)
● Low-quality and deformed CDs
● CDs with a transparent or translucent
recording area
● CDs that have had tape, stickers or CD-
R labels attached to them, or that have
had the label peeled off
242
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ CD player precautions
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the
CDs or the player itself.
● Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.
● Do not apply oil to the CD player.
● Store CDs away from direct sunlight.
● Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.
243
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Playing back MP3 and WMA discs
Type A
Type B
Volume
Random playback
Repeat play
Playback
Power
Disc eject
Displays text message
Search playback
Selecting a file
Selecting a folder
Selecting a file,
fast-forwarding and rewinding
Power Volume
Search playback
Disc eject
Displays text message
Playback
Selecting a file
or displays
folder list
Repeat play
Random playback
Selecting a folder, fast-forwarding
and rewinding
Selecting a
file
244
3-2. Using the audio system
Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs
→P. 237
Selecting and scanning a folder
Type A
■ Selecting folders one at a time
Press “∧” or “∨” on to select the desired folder.
■ Scanning the first file of all the folders
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first ten seconds of the first file in each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold “∨” on until you hear a beep.
Type B
■ Selecting folders one at a time
Press ( ) or ( ) to select the desired folder.
■ Selecting a folder and file from a folder list
Press .
The folder list will be displayed.
Turn and press to select a folder and a file.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
245
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold ( ) until you hear a beep.
■ Scanning a folder
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first file in the each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
Selecting and scanning files
■ Selecting one file at a time
Turn or , or press “∧” or “∨” on or to
select the desired file.
■ Selecting the desired file by cueing the files in the folder
Press or .
When the desired file is reached, press or
once again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
→P. 237
STEP
1
STEP
2
246
3-2. Using the audio system
Random playback
Type A
■ Playing files from a particular folder in random order
Press (RAND).
To cancel, press the button once more.
■ Playing all of the files on a disc in random order
Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the button again.
Type B
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Folder random → Disc random → Off
Repeat play
Type A
■ Repeating a file
Press (RPT).
To cancel, press the button once more.
■ Repeating all of the files on a folder
Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.
To cancel, press the button again.
Type B
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat → Folder repeat* → Off
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
247
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Switching the display
Type A
Press .
Each time is pressed, the display changes in the following
order:
Folder no./File no./Elapsed time → Folder name → File name → Album
title (MP3 only) → Track title → Artist name.
Type B
Press .
Track title, Artist name and Album title (MP3 only) are shown on the dis-
play.
To return to the previous display, press or (BACK).
248
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Display
→P. 239
■ Error messages
“CD CHECK”: This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the player.
The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.
“NO MUSIC” (type A): This indicates that MP3/WMA files are not included in
the CD.
“WAIT” or “PLEASE WAIT” (type A):Operation has stopped due to a high
temperature inside the player. Wait for
a while and then press .
Contact your Toyota dealer if the CD
still cannot be played.
“ERROR” (type B): This indicates a problem either in the CD or inside the
player.
“NO SUPPORT” (type B):This indicates that MP3/WMA files are not
included in the CD.
■ Discs that can be used
→P. 240
■ CD player protection feature
→P. 240
■ If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for
extended periods
→P. 240
■ Lens cleaners
→P. 240
249
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■ MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and to
the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224,
256, 320 (kbps)
MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8, 16, 24, 32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112, 128,
144, 160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (only compatible with 2-channel playback)
Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)
Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)
● Compatible media
Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-
RWs.
Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status
of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may
jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.
250
3-2. Using the audio system
● Compatible disc formats
The following disc formats can be used.
• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2
CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2
• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not
be displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters
• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files per disc: 255
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
● Multi-sessions
As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play
discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can
be played.
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.
(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3 and WMA playback
When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc
are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file
is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you
do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnec-
essary folders.
If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,
only music data can be played.
251
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and
WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage
to the speakers.
● Playback
• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,
depending on the characteristics of the disc.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may
take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may
not be possible at all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade-
marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.
NOTICE
■ CDs and adapters that cannot be used
→P. 241
■ CD player precautions
→P. 242
252
3-2. Using the audio system
Operating an iPod
∗
∗: If equipped
Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle
speakers.
■ Connecting an iPod
Open the cover and connect
an iPod using an iPod cable.
Turn on the power of the iPod if
it is not turned on.
Press .
STEP
1
STEP
2
253
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■ Control panel
iPod menu
mode
VolumePower
Selecting an iPod
menu/song or
displays song list
Shuffle playback
Repeat play
Playback
Displays text message
Selecting a
track
Reverse
Fast-forward
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
254
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a play mode
Press (MENU) to select iPod menu mode.
Turning clockwise changes the play mode in the fol-
lowing order:
“Playlists”→“Artists”→“Albums”→“Songs”→“Podcasts”→“Genres”
→“Composers”→“Audiobooks”
Press to select the desired play mode.
■ Play mode list
Play mode
First
selection
Second
selection
Third
selection
Fourth
selection
“Playlists”
Playlists
select
Songs
select
--
“Artists” Artists select
Albums
select
Songs
select
-
“Albums”
Albums
select
Songs
select
--
“Songs” Songs select - - -
“Podcasts”
Podcasts
select
Episodes
select
--
“Genres” Genre select Artists select
Albums
select
Songs
select
“Composers”
Composers
select
Albums
select
Songs
select
-
“Audiobooks”
Audiobooks
select
Chapters
select
--
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
255
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■ Selecting a list
Turn to display the first selection list.
Press to select the desired item.
Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.
Repeat the same procedure to select the desired item.
To return to the previous selection list, press (BACK).
Selecting songs
Turn or press “∧” or “∨” on to select the desired song.
Selecting a song from the song list
Press .
The song list will be displayed.
Turn to select a song.
Press to play the song.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
256
3-2. Using the audio system
Fast-forwarding and reversing songs
To fast-forward or reverse, press ( ) or
().
Shuffle playback
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Track shuffle → Album shuffle → Off
Repeat play
Press
(RPT).
To cancel, press (RPT) again.
Switching the display
Press .
To return to the previous display, press or (BACK).
Adjusting sound quality and volume balance
Press to enter iPod menu mode.
Press to change sound modes. (→P. 269)
STEP
1
STEP
2
257
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■ About iPod
● “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic acces-
sory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone,
respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple per-
formance standards.
● Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance
with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this
accessory with iPod or iPhone may affect wireless performance.
● iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano and iPod touch are trademarks of
Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
■ iPod functions
● When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod
mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last
used.
● Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions
may not be available. If a function is unavailable due to a malfunction (as
opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device and recon-
necting it once again may resolve the problem.
● While connected to the system, the iPod cannot be operated with its own
controls. It is necessary to use the controls of the vehicle’s audio system
instead.
■ iPod problems
To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect
your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.
For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Man-
ual.
■ Display
→P. 240
258
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Error messages
“iPod ERROR”: This indicates that the data in the iPod cannot be read.
“ERROR 3”: This indicates that the iPod may be malfunctioning.
“ERROR 4”: This indicates that an overcurrent error has occurred.
“ERROR 5”: This indicates that an iPod communication error has
occurred.
“ERROR 6”: This indicates that an authentication error has occurred.
“NO SONGS”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.
“NO PLAYLIST”: This indicates that some available songs are not found in
a selected playlist.
“UPDATE YOUR iPOD”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not
compatible. Upgrade your iPod software to the lat-
est version.
259
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■ Compatible models
The following iPod
®
, iPod nano
®
, iPod classic
®
, iPod touch
®
and iPhone
®
devices can be used with this system.
● Made for
• iPod touch (4th generation)
• iPod touch (3rd generation)
• iPod touch (2nd generation)
• iPod touch (1st generation)
• iPod classic
• iPod with video
• iPod nano (6th generation)
• iPod nano (5th generation)
• iPod nano (4th generation)
• iPod nano (3rd generation)
• iPod nano (2nd generation)
• iPod nano (1st generation)
• iPhone 4
• iPhone 3GS
• iPhone 3G
• iPhone
Depending on differences between models or software versions etc., some
models might be incompatible with this system.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
● Maximum number of lists in device: 9999
● Maximum number of songs in device: 65535
● Maximum number of songs per list: 65535
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.
260
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to iPod
● Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may
become high, resulting in damage to the iPod.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is
connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or
its terminal.
261
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Operating a USB memory
∗
Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the
vehicle speakers.
■ Connecting a USB memory
Open the cover and connect a
USB memory.
Turn on the power of the USB
memory if it is not turned on.
Press .
STEP
1
STEP
2
∗: If equipped
262
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Control panel
VolumePower
Selecting a file
or displays
folder list
Random playback
Repeat play
Playback
Search playback
Displays text message
Selecting a folder,
fast-forwarding and rewinding
Selecting a
track
263
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Selecting a folder
■ Selecting folders one at a time
To select the desired folder, press ( ) or ( ).
■ Selecting a folder and file from a folder list
Press .
The folder list will be displayed.
Turn and press to select a folder and a file.
To return to the previous display, press (BACK).
■ Returning to the first folder
Press and hold ( ) until you hear a beep.
Scanning a folder
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first file in the each folder will be played.
When the desired folder is reached, press again.
Selecting files
Turn , or press “∧” or “∨” on to select the desired file.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
264
3-2. Using the audio system
Scanning files
Press .
The first 10 seconds of all files in the folder will be played.
When the desired file is reached, press again.
Fast-forwarding and reversing files
→P. 256
Random playback
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Folder random → Disc random → Off
Repeat play
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
File repeat → Folder repeat* → Off
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Switching the display
Press .
Track title, Artist name and Album title (MP3 only) are shown on the dis-
play.
To return to the previous display, press or (BACK).
STEP
1
STEP
2
265
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
■ USB memory functions
● Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, the
device itself may not be operable and certain functions may not be avail-
able. If the device is inoperable or a function is unavailable due to a mal-
function (as opposed to a system specification), disconnecting the device
and reconnecting it once again may resolve the problem.
● If the USB memory still does not begin operation after being discon-
nected and reconnected, format the memory.
■ Display
→P. 240
■ Error messages
“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.
“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB
memory.
■ USB memory
● Compatible devices
USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback
● Compatible device formats
The following device formats can be used:
• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12 Mbps)
• File formats: FAT12/16/32 (Windows)
• Correspondence class: Mass storage class
MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above
may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be
displayed correctly.
Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:
• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels
• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)
• Maximum number of files in a device: 9999
• Maximum number of files per folder: 255
266
3-2. Using the audio system
● MP3 and WMA files
MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.
Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using
MP3 compression.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.
This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3
format.
There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and
to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.
● MP3 file compatibility
• Compatible standards
MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERIII, MPEG2.5)
• Compatible sampling frequencies
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)
MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)
MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)
MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)
MPEG2.5: 8-160 (kbps)
• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and
monaural
● WMA file compatibility
• Compatible standards
WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9
• Compatible sampling frequencies
HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)
• Compatible bit rates
HIGH PROFILE 48-320 (kbps, CBR)
● File names
The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those
with the extension .mp3 or .wma.
267
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
● ID3 and WMA tags
ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track
title, artist name, etc.
The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3
tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)
WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the
track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.
● MP3 and WMA playback
• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in
the USB memory are checked. Once the file check is finished, the first
MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more quickly,
we recommend that you do not include any files other than MP3 or
WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.
• When the USB memory is connected and the audio source is changed
to USB memory mode, the USB memory will start playing the first file in
the first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the
contents have not been changed), the USB memory will resume play
from the same point in which it was last used.
● Extensions
If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and
WMA files, they will be skipped (not played).
● Playback
• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit
rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.
• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for
MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the
encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of
playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at
all.
• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.
268
3-2. Using the audio system
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to USB memory
● Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-
cle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.
● Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory
while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB
memory or its terminal.
269
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Optimal use of the audio system
Type A
Type B
Adjusting the sound quality and ASL
Adjusting the sound quality and ASL
Menu button
270
3-2. Using the audio system
Using the audio control function
■ Changing sound quality modes
Type A
Pressing selects the mode to be changed in the following
order.
“BAS”→“TRE”→“FAD”→“BAL”→“ASL”
Type B
Press .
Turn to select “Sound Setting”.
Press .
Turn to select the desired mode.
“BASS”, “TREBLE”, “FADER”, “BALANCE”, or “ASL”
Press .
■ Adjusting sound quality
Turning or adjusts the level.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
271
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Type A
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each radio mode or
CD mode.
Type B
*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.
Mode
displayed
Sound qual-
ity mode
Level
Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
“BAS” Bass* -5 to 5
Low High
“TRE” Treble* -5 to 5
“FAD”
Front/rear
volume
balance
R7 to F7 Shifts to rear
Shifts to
front
“BAL”
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
Mode
displayed
Sound
quality mode
Level
Turn to the
left
Turn to the
right
“BASS” Bass* -5 to 5
Low High
“TREBLE” Treble* -5 to 5
“FADER”
Front/rear
volume
balance
R7 to F7 Shifts to rear Shifts to front
“BALANCE”
Left/right
volume
balance
L7 to R7 Shifts to left Shifts to right
272
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Adjusting the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL)
When “ASL” is selected, turning or to the right
changes the amount of “ASL” in the order of “LOW”, “MID” and
“HIGH”.
Turning or to the left turns “ASL” off.
ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to vehi-
cle speed.
■ Trademark owned by SRS Labs, Inc. (provided to the audio models
with SRS Labs technology)
The audio systems utilize SRS FOCUS
®
and SRS TruBass
®
audio
enhancement technologies, under license from SRS Labs, Inc., in all modes
except AM radio mode.
FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs,
Inc.
FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from
SRS Labs, Inc.
SRS TruBass
®
enhances the perception of bass frequencies to provide
deep, rich bass response from any size speaker.
SRS FOCUS
®
raises the audio image from non-optimally placed speakers
up to the natural listening height at ear level.
273
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the AUX port
This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen
to it through the vehicle’s speakers.
Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.
Type A
Type B
STEP
1
274
3-2. Using the audio system
■ Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system
The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle's audio controls. All other
adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.
■ When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet
Noise may occur during playback. Use the power source of the portable
audio device.
Type A
Press .
Type B
Press .
STEP
2
STEP
2
275
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Using the steering wheel audio switches
∗
∗: If equipped
Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the
steering wheel.
Type A
Volume
Radio mode: Selects radio
stations
CD mode: Selects tracks
and files (MP3 and WMA)
iPod mode: Selects songs
USB memory mode
∗
:
Selects folders and
files
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
∗
:
Selects an album and
tracks
Turns the power on, selects
audio source
276
3-2. Using the audio system
Turning on the power
Press or when the audio system is turned off.
Changing the audio source
Press or when the audio system is turned on. The
audio source changes each time or is pressed. If a
mode cannot be used, it will be skipped.
∗: If equipped
Type B
Volume
Radio mode: Selects radio
stations
CD mode: Selects tracks
and files (MP3 and WMA)
iPod mode: Selects songs
USB memory mode
∗
:
Selects folders and
files
Bluetooth
®
audio mode
∗
:
Selects an album and
tracks
Turns the power on, selects
audio source
277
3-2. Using the audio system
3
Interior features
Adjusting the volume
Press “+” on or to increase the volume and “-” to
decrease the volume.
Press and hold or to continue increasing or decreasing
the volume.
Silencing a sound
Press and hold or .
To cancel, press and hold or again.
Selecting a radio station
Press or to select radio mode.
Press “∧” or “∨” on or to select a preset station.
To scan for receivable stations, press and hold or
until you hear a beep.
STEP
1
STEP
2
278
3-2. Using the audio system
Selecting a track/file or song
Press or to select CD, iPod, USB memory or
Bluetooth
®
audio mode.
Press “∧” or “∨” on or to select the desired
track/file or song.
Selecting a folder or album
Press or to select CD, USB memory or
Bluetooth
®
audio mode.
Press and hold “∧” or “∨” on or until you hear a
beep.
CAUTION
■ To reduce the risk of an accident
Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
279
3
Interior features
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Bluetooth
®
audio/phone
∗
■ Conditions affecting operation
The Bluetooth
®
audio/phone may not operate normally in the following situa-
tions:
● The portable player does not support Bluetooth
®
● The cellular phone is located outside the service area
● The Bluetooth
®
device is switched off
● The Bluetooth
®
device has a low battery
● The Bluetooth
®
device is not connected to the system
● The Bluetooth
®
device is behind the seat or in the glove box or console
box, or metal material covers or touches the device
■ Bluetooth
®
audio
The Bluetooth
®
audio system enables you to enjoy music played
on a portable digital audio player (portable player) from the vehi-
cle speakers via wireless communication.
This audio system supports Bluetooth
®
, a wireless data system
capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your
portable player does not support Bluetooth
®
, the Bluetooth
®
audio system will not function.
■ Bluetooth
®
phone (hands-free phone system)
This system supports Bluetooth
®
, which allows you to make or
receive calls without using cables to connect a cellular phone
and the system, and without operating the cellular phone.
∗: If equipped
280
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
■ When transferring ownership of the vehicle
Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-
erly accessed. (→P. 300)
■ About Bluetooth
®
■ Compatible models
● Bluetooth
®
specifications:
Ver. 1.1, or higher (recommended: Ver. 2.1 + EDR or higher)
● Following Profiles:
• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0, or higher (recom-
mended: Ver. 1.2 or higher)
• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (rec-
ommended: Ver. 1.3 or higher)
Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be
connected to the Bluetooth
®
audio system. However, please note that some
functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.
● Cellular phone
• HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher (recommended: Ver. 1.5)
• OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
● Do not use a cellular phone.
● Do not connect Bluetooth
®
device or operate the controls.
Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG. Inc.
281
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to Bluetooth
®
device
Do not leave Bluetooth
®
device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the
vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the device.
282
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone
■ Audio unit
Bluetooth
®
connection con-
dition
If “BT” is not displayed, the
Bluetooth
®
audio/phone
cannot be used.
Display
A message, name, number,
etc. is displayed.
Lower-case characters and
special characters cannot
be displayed.
Displays the set up menu
Selects items such as menu
and number
Turn: Selects an item
Press: Inputs the selected
item
Displays information that is
too long to be displayed at
one time on the display
(press and hold)
Selects speed dials
On-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem off/ends a call/refuses a
call
Off-hook switch
Turns the hands-free sys-
tem on/starts a call
283
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
■ Steering wheel switches
→P. 275
■ Microphone
Vehicles with moon roof
Vehicles without moon roof
284
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Using the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone for the first time
Before using the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone, it is necessary to register a
Bluetooth
®
device in the system. Follow the procedure below to reg-
ister (pair) a device:
Press and select “Bluetooth” using .
Press and select “Pairing” using .
A passkey will be displayed.
SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) incompatible Bluetooth
®
devices: Input the passkey into the device.
SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth
®
devices:
Select “Yes” to register the device. Depending on the type of
device, it may register automatically.
If a Bluetooth
®
device has both music player and cellular phone func-
tions, both functions will be registered at the same time. When delet-
ing the device, both functions will be deleted at the same time.
If the off-hook switch is pressed and the “PHONE” mode is entered
when no phones have been registered, the registration screen will be
automatically displayed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
285
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
Menu list of the Bluetooth
®
audio/phone
First menu Second menu Third menu Operation details
“Bluetooth”
“BT Pairing” -
Registering a
Bluetooth
®
device
“List Phone” -
Listing the registered
cellular phones
“List Audio” -
Listing the registered
portable players
“Passkey” - Changing the passkey
“BT Power” -
Setting automatic
connection of the device
on or off
“Bluetooth info”
“Device Name”
“Device
Address”
Displaying the device
status
“Display
Setting”
-
Setting the automatic
connection confirmation
display to on or off
“Initialize” - Initializing the settings
286
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
“Phone”
“Phonebook”
“Add contacts” Adding a new number
“Add SD”
Registering a speed
dial
“Delete Call
History”
Deleting a number
stored in the call history
“Delete
contacts”
Deleting a number
stored in the
phonebook
“Delete other
PB”
Deleting a phonebook’s
data
“HF Sound
Setting”
“Call volume” Setting call volume
“Ring tone
volume”
Setting ringtone volume
“Ringtone” Setting the ringtone
“Transfer
Histories”
-
Transferring the call
histories
■ Bluetooth
®
audio/phone system functions
Depending on the Bluetooth
®
device, certain functions may not be available.
First menu Second menu Third menu Operation details
287
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
Operating a Bluetooth
®
enabled portable player
Selecting an album
Press ( ) or ( ) to select the desired album.
Scanning an album
Press and hold until you hear a beep.
The first 10 seconds of the first track in the each album will be
played.
When the desired album is reached, press again.
Selecting tracks
Press “∧” or “∨” on to select the desired track.
Random playback
Repeat play
Playback
Playback/Pause Displays text message
VolumePower
Selecting items
Selecting an album, fast-forwarding and rewinding
Search playback
Selecting a
track
STEP
1
STEP
2
288
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
Scanning tracks
Press .
The first 10 seconds of all tracks in the album will be played.
When the desired track is reached, press again.
Playing and pausing tracks
Press ( ) to play or pause a track.
Fast-forwarding and reversing tracks
→P. 256
Random playback
Pressing (RDM) changes modes in the following order:
Album random → All track random → Off
Repeat play
Pressing (RPT) changes modes in the following order:
Track repeat → Album repeat* → Off
*: Available except when RDM (random playback) is selected
Switching the display
Press .
Track title and Artist name are displayed on the display.
To return to the previous display, press or (BACK).
STEP
1
STEP
2
289
3-3. Using the Bluetooth
®
audio system
3
Interior features
■ Bluetooth
®
audio system functions
Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain
functions may not be available.
290
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Making a phone call
To enter the “PHONE” mode, press the off-hook switch.
■ Making a phone call
● Dialing by selecting a name
● Speed dialing
● Dialing by entering the number
● Dialing from call histories
■ Receiving a phone call
● Answering the phone
● Refusing the call
■ Operations during a call
● Transferring a call
● Muting your voice
● Inputting digits
● Setting call volume
■ Adjusting the ringtone volume when receiving a call
291
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Dialing by selecting a name
Select “Phonebook” using .
Select the desired name using and press the off-hook
switch.
By pressing (Add S. Dial) and one of the speed dial buttons
(from to ) while the desired name is selected, it can be
registered as a speed dial.
Speed dialing
Select “Speed dials” using .
Press the desired preset button (from to ) and
press the off-hook switch.
By pressing (Add S. Dial) and one of the speed dial buttons
(from to ) while the desired name is selected, it can be
registered as a speed dial.
Dialing by entering the number
Select “Dial by number” using .
Enter the phone number and press the off-hook switch.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
292
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Dialing from call histories
Select “All calls”, “Missed calls”, “Incoming calls” or “Outgoing
calls” using .
Select a desired number using and press the off-hook
switch.
The following operations can be performed:
● Registering a number as a speed dial
Press (Add S. Dial) and then press and hold the desired
preset button (from to ).
● Deleting the selected number
Press (DELETE) and press (YES).
When receiving a phone call
■ Answering the phone
Press the off-hook switch.
■ Refusing the call
Press the on-hook switch.
■ Receiving a call when on another call
Press the off-hook switch.
Pressing the off-hook switch again returns you to the previous call.
STEP
1
STEP
2
293
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Operations during a call
● Transferring a call
A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system
while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the fol-
lowing methods:
a. Operate the cellular phone.
Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the oper-
ation of the phone.
b. Press the * (PHONE).
*: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call from
the cellular phone to the system during a call.
● Muting your voice
Press (MUTE).
● Inputting digits
Press (0-9) and using the to input the desired dig-
its.
• To send the input digits press (SEND).
• When finished, press (EXIT) to return to the previous screen.
● Setting call volume
Change the call volume using .
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
294
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Adjusting the ringtone volume when receiving a call
Change the ringtone volume using .
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
■ When talking on the phone
● Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.
● Keep the volume of the received voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will
increase.
■ Automatic volume adjustment
When vehicle speed is 50 mph (80 km/h) or more, the volume automatically
increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when vehicle
speed drops to 43 mph (70 km/h) or less.
■ Phone call system functions
Depending on the cellular phone, certain functions may not be available.
■ Situations where the system may not recognize your voice
● When driving on a rough road
● When driving at high speeds
● When air is blowing out of the vents onto the microphone
● When the air conditioning fan emits a loud noise
295
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Using the “SET UP” menu (“Bluetooth” menu)
Registering a Bluetooth
®
device in the system allows the system to
function. The following functions can be used for registered devices:
■ Functions and operation procedures
Press and select “Bluetooth” using .
Press and select one of the following functions
using .
● Registering a Bluetooth
®
device
“BT Pairing”
● Listing the registered cellular phones
“List Phone”
● Listing the registered portable players
“List Audio”
● Changing the passkey
“Passkey”
● Setting automatic connection of the device on or off
“BT Power”
● Displaying the device status
“Bluetooth info”
● Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or
off
“Display Setting”
● Initialization
“Initialize”
STEP
1
STEP
2
296
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Registering a portable player
Select “Pairing” using , and perform the procedure for regis-
tering a portable player. (→P. 284)
Listing the registered cellular phones
Select “List Phone” using . The list of registered cellular
phones will be displayed.
● Connecting the registered cellular phone to the audio system
Select the name of the cellular phone to be connected
using .
Select “Select” using .
● Deleting a registered cellular phone
Select the name of the cellular phone to be deleted using
.
Select “Delete” using .
Press (YES).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
297
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Listing the registered portable players
Select “List Audio” using . The list of registered portable play-
ers will be displayed.
● Connecting the registered portable player to the audio system
Select the name of the portable player to be connected
using .
Select “Select” using .
● Deleting the registered portable player
Select the name of the portable player to be deleted using
.
Select “Delete” using .
Press (YES).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
298
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Changing the passkey
Select “Passkey” using .
Select a 4 to 8-digit passkey using .
Input the number 1 digit at a time.
When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has
been input, press again.
If the passkey to be registered has 8 digits, pressing again
is not necessary.
Setting automatic connection of the device on or off
If “BT Power” is set to on, the registered device will be connected
automatically when the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” position.
Select “BT Power” using .
Select “ON” or “OFF” using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
299
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Displaying the device status
Select “Bluetooth info” using .
● Displaying the device name
Select “Device Name” using .
● Displaying the device address
Select “Device Address” using .
Setting the automatic connection confirmation display to on or off
If the “Display Setting” is set to on, the portable player connection sta-
tus will be displayed when the engine switch is turned to the “ACC” or
“ON” position.
Select “Display Setting” using .
Select “ON” or “OFF” using .
STEP
1
STEP
2
300
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Initialization
Select “Initialize” using .
● Initializing the sound settings
Select “Sound setting” using and press (YES).
For details about sound settings (→P. 269)
● Initializing the device information
Select “Car Device Info” using and press (YES).
Automatic connection of a portable device, automatic connection confir-
mation display and the passkey will be initialized.
● Initializing all the settings
Select “All Initialize” using and press (YES).
■ The number of Bluetooth
®
devices that can be registered
Up to 5 Bluetooth
®
devices can be registered in the system.
301
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Using the “SET UP” menu (“Phone” menu)
■ Functions and operation procedures
To enter the menu of each function, press and follow
the steps below using :
● Adding a new phone number
1. “Phone” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Add contacts”
● Setting speed dials
1. “Phone” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Add SD”
● Deleting call histories
1. “Phone” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Delete Call History”
● Deleting a registered phone number
1. “Phone” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Delete contacts”
● Deleting another cellular phone’s phonebook
1. “Phone” → 2. “Phonebook” → 3. “Delete other PB”
● Setting call volume
1. “Phone” → 2. “HF Sound Setting” → 3. “Call Volume”
● Setting ringtone volume
1. “Phone” → 2. “HF Sound Setting” → 3. “Ringtone Volume”
● Setting ringtone
1. “Phone” → 2. “HF Sound Setting” → 3. “Ringtone”
● Transferring call histories
1. “Phone” → 2. “Transfer Histories”
302
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Adding a new phone number
Select “Add contacts” using .
● Transferring all contacts from the cellular phone
Select “Overwrite all contacts” using and press
(YES).
● Transferring one contact from the cellular phone
Select “Add one contact” using and press (YES).
Setting speed dials
Select “Add SD” using .
Select the desired data using .
Press and hold the desired preset button (from to
).
For details about setting speed dials from the call history: →P. 292
For details about deleting speed dials: →P. 292
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
303
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Deleting call histories
Select “Delete Call History” using .
● Deleting outgoing call history
Select “Outgoing Calls” using .
Select the desired phone number using and press
(YES).
To delete all outgoing call history data, press (ALL) and
then press (YES).
● Deleting incoming call history
Select “Incoming calls” using .
Select the desired phone number using and press
(YES).
To delete all incoming call history data, press (ALL) and
then press (YES).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
304
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
● Deleting missed call history
Select “Missed Calls” using .
Select the desired phone number using and press
(YES).
To delete all missed call history data, press (ALL) and then
press (YES).
● Deleting a number from all call histories (Outgoing calls, Incoming
calls and Missed calls)
Select “All Calls” using .
Select the desired phone number using and press
(YES).
To delete all of the call histories data, press (ALL) and then
press (YES).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
305
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
3
Interior features
Deleting a registered phone number
Select “Delete contacts” using .
Select the desired phone number using and press
(YES).
To delete all of the registered phone numbers, select “All delete”
using and press (YES).
Deleting another cellular phone’s phonebook
Select “Delete other PB” using .
Select the desired phonebook using and press
(YES).
Setting call volume
Select “Call Volume” using .
Change the call volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
306
3-4. Using the hands-free phone system (for cellular phone)
Setting ringtone volume
Select “Ringtone Volume” using .
Change the ringtone volume.
To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.
To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.
Setting ringtone
Select “Ringtone” using .
Using , select a ringtone (1 - 3). To set the selected
ringtone, press .
Transferring call histories
Select “Transfer Histories” using and press (YES).
■ Phone number
Up to 1000 names can be stored.
■ Call history
Up to 10 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing, incoming and
missed call history memories.
■ Limitation of number of digits
A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
307
3
Interior features
3-5. Using the interior lights
Interior lights list
Interior light (→P. 309)
Personal lights or personal/interior lights (→P. 309, 310)
“ENGINE START STOP” switch light (vehicles with smart key
system)
308
3-5. Using the interior lights
■ Illuminated entry system
Vehicles without moon roof
The interior light (with the switch in the “DOOR” position) and “ENGINE
START STOP” switch light (vehicles with smart key system) automatically
turn on/off according to “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode (vehicles with
smart key system) or engine switch position (vehicles without smart key sys-
tem), the presence of the electronic key (vehicles with smart key system),
whether the doors are locked/unlocked (vehicles with power door lock sys-
tem) and whether the doors are open/closed.
Vehicles with moon roof
The interior light, personal/interior lights (with the switch in the “DOOR” posi-
tion) and “ENGINE START STOP” switch light (vehicles with smart key sys-
tem) automatically turn on/off according to “ENGINE START STOP” switch
mode (vehicles with smart key system) or engine switch position (vehicles
without smart key system), the presence of the electronic key (vehicles with
smart key system), whether the doors are locked/unlocked (vehicles with
power door lock system) and whether the doors are open/closed.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
If the interior light, personal/interior lights (vehicles with moon roof) and
“ENGINE START STOP” switch light (vehicles with smart key system)
remain on when the door is not fully closed and the switch is in the “DOOR”
position, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
Settings (e.g. The time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed.
(Customizable features →P. 491)
309
3-5. Using the interior lights
3
Interior features
Interior light
“DOOR” position
Off
On
Personal lights (vehicles without moon roof)
On/off
Interior light and personal lights
310
3-5. Using the interior lights
Personal/interior lights (vehicles with moon roof)
■ Interior lights
“DOOR” position
Off
On
■ Personal lights
On/off
Personal/interior lights
311
3
Interior features
3-6. Using the storage features
List of storage features
CAUTION
■ Items that should not be left in the storage spaces
Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this
may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:
● Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact
with other stored items.
● Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other
stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,
causing a fire hazard.
Auxiliary boxes
Glove box
Bottle holders
Cup holders
Console box
312
3-6. Using the storage features
Glove box
Pull up the lever.
Console box
Type A
Lift the lid while pulling the lever.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the glove box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Glove box and console box
313
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Type B
Lift the lid while pulling the lever.
Lift the lid and tray.
Lift the lid.
Pull the tray up to open the box.
■ When using the console box lid as an armrest (type B only)
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the console box closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
If necessary, the console box lid can slide
forward. Pull the lid forward by grasping
the front of the lid.
Console box
314
3-6. Using the storage features
Cup holders
Front
Rear
Pull the lid to open.
Cup holders
315
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
■ Adjusting the size of the cup holder (front)
■ Cup holder insert (front)
Remove the cup holder insert.
Change the cup holder insert position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
The cup holder insert may be removed for
cleaning.
Cup holders
316
3-6. Using the storage features
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the cup holder
Do not place anything other than cups or beverage cans in the cup holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent
burns.
■ When not in use
Keep the rear cup holders closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
Cup holders
317
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Auxiliary boxes
Type A
Pull up the lever.
Type B (if equipped)
Pull the lid.
Type C (vehicles with moon roof)
Push the lid.
Auxiliary boxes
318
3-6. Using the storage features
Type D
Pull up the lever.
CAUTION
■ Caution while driving
Keep the auxiliary boxes closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■ Items unsuitable for storing (type C only)
Do not store items heavier than 0.4 lb. (0.2 kg).
Doing so may cause the auxiliary box to open and the items inside may fall
out, resulting in an accident.
Auxiliary boxes
319
3-6. Using the storage features
3
Interior features
Bottle holders
Front
Rear
CAUTION
■ Items unsuitable for the bottle holder
Do not place anything other than pet bottles in the bottle holders.
Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or
sudden braking and cause injury.
Bottle holders
320
3-7. Other interior features
Sun visors
Forward position:
Flip down.
Side position:
Flip down, unhook, and
swing to the side.
321
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Vanity mirrors
Slide the cover.
322
3-7. Other interior features
Clock
■ The clock is displayed when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
■ When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals
The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.
Adjusts the hour
Adjusts the minutes
323
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Ashtray
∗
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Keep the ashtray closed.
Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an
accident.
■ To prevent fire
● Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,
then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.
● Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.
Pull the lid to open.
Pull the ashtray to remove.
∗: If equipped
324
3-7. Other interior features
Cigarette lighter
∗
■ The cigarette lighter can be used when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
CAUTION
■ When not in use
Keep the lid closed.
Injuries may result in the event of an accident or sudden braking.
■ To avoid burns or fires
● Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.
● Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.
● Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.
Pull the lid to open, and push
the cigarette lighter down.
The cigarette lighter will pop up
when it is ready for use.
∗: If equipped
325
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Power outlet
∗
■ The power outlet can be used when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON
mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the power outlet
Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use.
Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-
cuit.
■ To prevent the fuse from being blown
Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.
■ To prevent the battery from being discharged
Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not
running.
∗: If equipped
The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on less
than 10 A.
326
3-7. Other interior features
Seat heaters
∗
■ The seat heaters can be used when
Vehicles with smart key system
The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
The engine switch is in the “ON” position.
CAUTION
■ Burns
● Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat
heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:
• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled
• Persons with sensitive skin
• Persons who are fatigued
• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping
drugs, cold remedies, etc.)
● Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.
Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature
of the seat and may lead to overheating.
Heats the driver’s seat
Heats the front passenger’s
seat
The indicator light is on while
the seat heater is operating.
Push the switch once again to
turn off the seat heater.
∗: If equipped
327
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
NOTICE
■ To prevent seat heater damage
Do not put unevenly weighted objects on the seat and do not stick sharp
objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.
■ To prevent battery discharge
Turn the switches off when the engine is not running.
328
3-7. Other interior features
Floor mat
CAUTION
Observe the following precautions.
Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering
with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may
become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.
■ When installing the driver's floor mat
● Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year
vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.
● Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat.
● Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
● Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.
● Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.
■ Before driving
Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same
model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place
onto the carpet.
Fix the floor mat in place using
the retaining hooks (clips) pro-
vided.
The shape of the retaining
hooks (clips) and the fixing
procedure of the floor mat for
your vehicle may differ from
those shown in the illustration.
For details, refer to the floor
mat retention clip installation
instructions supplied with the
clips.
● Check that the floor mat is securely
fixed in the correct place with all the
provided retaining hooks (clips). Be
especially careful to perform this check
after cleaning the floor.
● With the engine stopped and the shift
lever in P (automatic transmission) or N
(manual transmission), fully depress
each pedal to the floor to make sure it
does not interfere with the floor mat.
329
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
Compass
∗
The compass on the inside rear view mirror indicates the direction in
which the vehicle is heading.
■ Operation
To turn the compass on or off,
press and hold “AUTO” for 3
seconds.
■ Displays and directions
Display Direction
NNorth
NE Northeast
EEast
SE Southeast
S South
SW Southwest
WWest
NW Northwest
∗: If equipped
330
3-7. Other interior features
Calibrating the compass
The direction display deviates from the true direction determined by
the earth’s magnetic field. The amount of deviation varies according
to the geographic position of the vehicle.
If you cross over a map boundary shown in the illustration, the compass
will deviate.
To obtain higher precision or perfect calibration, refer to the following.
■ Deviation calibration
Stop the vehicle.
Press and hold “AUTO” for 6
seconds.
A number (1 to 15) appears on
the compass display.
Press “AUTO” and, referring to the map above, select the
number of the zone where you are.
If the direction is displayed several seconds after adjustment, the
calibration is complete.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
331
3-7. Other interior features
3
Interior features
■ Circling calibration
Stop the vehicle in a place where it is safe to drive in a circle.
Press and hold “AUTO” for 9
seconds.
C appears on the compass dis-
play.
Drive the vehicle at 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less in a circle until a
direction is displayed.
If there is not enough space to
drive in a circle, drive around the
block until the direction is dis-
played.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
■ Conditions unfavorable for correct operation
The compass may not show the correct direction in the following situations:
● The vehicle is stopped immediately after turning.
● The vehicle is on an inclined surface.
● The vehicle is in a place where the earth's magnetic field is subject to
interference by artificial magnetic fields (underground car park/parking
lot, under a steel tower, between buildings, roof car park/parking lot, near
an intersection, near a large vehicle, etc.).
● The vehicle has become magnetized.
(There is a magnet or metal object near the anti-glare inside rear view
mirror.)
● The battery has been disconnected.
● A door is open.
332
3-7. Other interior features
CAUTION
■ While driving the vehicle
Do not adjust the display. Be sure to adjust the display only when the vehicle
is stopped.
■ When doing the circling calibration
Be sure to secure a wide space, and watch out for people and vehicles in the
neighborhood. Do not violate any local traffic rules while performing circling
calibration.
NOTICE
■ To avoid compass malfunctions
Do not place magnets or any metal objects near the anti-glare inside rear
view mirror.
Doing this may cause a malfunction of the compass sensor.
■ To ensure normal operation of the compass
● Do not perform circling calibration of the compass in a place where the
earth's magnetic field is subject to interference by artificial magnetic fields.
● During calibration, do not operate electric systems (moon roof, power win-
dows, etc.) as they may interfere with the calibration.
334
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior
■ Automatic car washes
● Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.
● Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface
and harm your vehicle’s paint.
■ High pressure car washes
● Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity
of the windows.
● Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed
properly.
■ Aluminum wheels
● Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use
hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical
cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.
● Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after
driving for long distance in the hot weather.
● Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.
Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime
condition.
● Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle
body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any
dirt and dust.
Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a
chamois.
● For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-
oughly with water.
● Wipe away any water.
● Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.
If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle
body is cool.
335
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
■ Bumpers
Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.
CAUTION
■ Caution about the exhaust pipe
Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.
When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled
sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.
NOTICE
■ To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-
nents (aluminum wheels etc.)
● Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:
• After driving near the sea coast
• After driving on salted roads
• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface
• If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint
• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,
iron powder or chemical substances
• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud
• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface
● If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.
● To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place
with low humidity when storing the wheels.
■ Cleaning the exterior lights
● Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.
This may damage the surfaces of the lights.
● Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause damage to
the lenses.
336
4-1. Maintenance and care
Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior
The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and
keep it in top condition:
■ Protecting the vehicle interior
Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-
faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.
■ Cleaning the leather areas
● Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.
● Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with
diluted detergent.
Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool deter-
gent.
● Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly
wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.
● Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-
ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated
area.
■ Synthetic leather areas
● Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.
● Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a
sponge or soft cloth.
● Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the
dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.
337
4-1. Maintenance and care
4
Maintenance and care
■ Caring for leather areas
Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year
to maintain the quality of the vehicle's interior.
■ Shampooing the carpets
There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a
sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply
water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possi-
ble.
■ Seat belts
Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also
check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.
CAUTION
■ Water in the vehicle
● Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle. Doing so may cause electrical
components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.
● Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.
(→P. 87)
Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function
properly, resulting in death or severe injury.
■ Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)
Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off
the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident,
resulting in death or serious injury.
338
4-1. Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Cleaning detergents
● Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or
alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor
the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.
● Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other
interior part's painted surface may be damaged.
■ Preventing damage to leather surfaces
Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of
leather surfaces.
● Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.
● Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.
Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.
● Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax, on the
upholstery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior
heats up significantly.
■ Water on the floor
Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.
Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes
into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and
may also cause the body to rust.
■ Cleaning the inside of the rear window
● Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause
damage to the rear window defogger heater wires or antenna. Use a cloth
dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the
window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires or antenna.
● Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.
339
4
Maintenance and care
4-2. Maintenance
Maintenance requirements
■ Repair and replacement
It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure
performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or
if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war-
ranty coverage.
To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular
maintenance is essential. It is the owner’s responsibility to perform
regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance.
■ General maintenance
Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by your-
self or by a Toyota dealer.
■ Scheduled maintenance
Should be performed at specified intervals according to the
maintenance schedule.
For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
■ Do-it-yourself maintenance
You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself.
Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war-
ranty coverage.
The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.
For details about warranty coverage, see the separate “Owner’s War-
ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.
340
4-2. Maintenance
■ Reset the maintenance data (U.S.A. only)
After the required maintenance is performed according to the maintenance
schedule, please reset the maintenance data.
To reset the data, follow the procedures described below:
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or engine switch OFF with
the trip meter A reading shown.
While pressing the trip meter reset button (→P. 149), turn the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch or engine switch ON.
Continue to press and hold the button until the trip meter displays
000000.
■ Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer
● Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date
with the latest service information. They are well informed about the
operations of all systems on your vehicle.
● Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has
been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise
while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly
take care of it.
CAUTION
■ Warning in handling of battery
● Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile
components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a
well ventilated area.
● Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by
component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.
● Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead
compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands
after handling. (→P. 364)
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
341
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
General maintenance
Engine compartment
Items Check points
Battery
Check the connections.
(→P. 364)
Brake fluid At the correct level? (→P. 361)
Engine coolant At the correct level? (→P. 360)
Engine oil At the correct level? (→P. 356)
Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds?
Radiator/condenser/hoses
Not blocked with foreign matter?
(→P. 361)
Washer fluid At the correct level? (→P. 366)
Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be per-
formed at the intervals specified in the “Owner's Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement/Scheduled
Maintenance Guide”. It is recommended that any problem you notice
should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified
service shop for advice.
342
4-2. Maintenance
Vehicle interior
Items Check points
Accelerator pedal
• Moves smoothly (without uneven
pedal effort or catching)?
Automatic transmission “Park”
mechanism
• Can the vehicle be held securely
on an incline with the shift lever in
P?
Brake pedal
• Moves smoothly?
• Does it have appropriate clear-
ance and correct amount of free
play?
Brakes
• Not pull to one side when
applied?
• Loss of brake effectiveness?
• Spongy feeling brake pedal?
• Pedal almost touches floor?
Clutch pedal • Moves smoothly?
Head restraints
• Move smoothly and lock
securely?
Indicators/buzzers • Function properly?
Lights • Do all the lights come on?
Parking brake
• Moves smoothly?
• Can hold the vehicle securely on
an incline?
Seat belts
• Does the seat belt system oper-
ate smoothly?
• Are the belts undamaged?
Seats
• Do the seat controls operate
properly?
Steering wheel
• Moves smoothly?
• Has correct free play?
• No strange noises?
343
4-2. Maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Vehicle exterior
Items Check points
Doors/trunk • Operate smoothly?
Engine hood • The lock system works properly?
Fluid leaks
• Is there any leakage after park-
ing?
Tires
• Inflation pressure is correct?
• Tire surfaces not worn or dam-
aged?
• Tires rotated according to the
maintenance schedule?
• Wheel nuts are not loose?
CAUTION
■ If the engine is running
Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before per-
forming maintenance checks.
344
4-2. Maintenance
Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs
Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which
include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system moni-
tors the operation of the emission control system.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on
The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere
in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/
M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer
to service the vehicle.
■ Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test:
● When the battery is disconnected or discharged
Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are
erased.
Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes
may not be completely set.
● When the fuel tank cap is loose
The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary mal-
function and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.
■ When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several
driving trips
The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the
vehicle is driven 40 or more times.
■ If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test
Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.
345
4
Maintenance and care
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Do-it-yourself service precautions
If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct
procedures as given in these sections.
Items Parts and tools
Battery condition (→P. 364)
•Warm water
• Baking soda
• Grease
• Conventional wrench
(for terminal clamp bolts)
Brake fluid level (→P. 361)
• FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE
J1703 brake fluid
• Rag or paper towel
• Funnel (used only for adding
brake fluid)
Engine coolant level (→P. 360)
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-
amine, non-nitrite and non-borate
coolant with long-life hybrid
organic acid technology.
For the U.S.A.:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 50%
coolant and 50% deionized
water.
For Canada:
“Toyota Super Long Life
Coolant” is pre-mixed with 55%
coolant and 45% deionized
water.
• Funnel (used only for adding
engine coolant)
Engine oil level (→P. 356)
• “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or
equivalent
• Rag or paper towel, funnel
(used only for adding oil)
346
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Items Parts and tools
Fuses (→P. 389)
• Fuse with same amperage rating
as original
Radiator and condenser
(→P. 361)
⎯
Tire inflation pressure (→P. 376)
• Tire pressure gauge
• Compressed air source
Washer fluid (→P. 366)
• Water washer fluid containing
antifreeze (for winter use)
• Funnel
347
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may
move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death
or serious injury observe the following precautions.
■ When working on the engine compartment
● Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine
drive belt.
● Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right
after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.
● Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the
engine compartment.
● Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-
tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.
● Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
● Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with
clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
■ When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille
Vehicles with smart key system: Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
is OFF. With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the
electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on
and/or the coolant temperature is high. (→P. 361)
Vehicles without smart key system: Be sure the engine switch is OFF. With
the engine switch in the “ON” position, the electric cooling fans may auto-
matically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant tempera-
ture is high. (→P. 361)
■ Safety glasses
Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from
getting in the eyes.
348
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ If you remove the air cleaner
Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due
to dirt in the air. Also, a backfire could cause a fire in the engine compart-
ment.
349
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Hood
Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.
Pull the hood release lever.
The hood will pop up slightly.
Lift the auxiliary catch lever
and lift the hood.
Hold the hood open by insert-
ing the supporting rod into the
slot.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
350
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Pre-driving check
Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.
If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion
and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.
■ After installing the support rod into the slot
Make sure the rod supports the hood securely from falling down on to your
head or body.
NOTICE
■ When closing the hood
Be sure to return the support rod to its clip before closing the hood. Closing
the hood with the support rod up could cause the hood to bend.
351
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Positioning a floor jack
When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor-
rectly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.
■ Front
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
■ Rear
Take out the jack attachment.
STEP
1
352
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Set the jack attachment on the
floor jack with the “FOR-
WARD” facing towards the
front of the vehicle, and place
the jack.
Before raising the vehicle,
make sure that the floor jack is
positioned so that the jack
point fits securely inside the
groove on the jack attach-
ment.
STEP
2
Front of vehicle
STEP
3
353
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■ When raising your vehicle
Make sure to observe the following to reduce the possibility of death or seri-
ous injury.
● When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with
the jack.
● Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle.
● Do not put any part of your body or get underneath the vehicle supported
only by the floor jack.
● Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level
surface.
● Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack.
● Stop the vehicle on level firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and put
the shift lever in P (automatic transmission) or R (manual transmission).
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle.
● When raising the vehicle, do not place any objects on top of or underneath
the floor jack other than the jack attachment.
● Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack
such as the one shown in the illustra-
tion.
● Make sure to set the jack attachment
properly at the jack point.
Raising the vehicle with an improperly
positioned floor jack will damage the
vehicle and may cause the vehicle to
fall off the floor jack.
354
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine compartment
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 360)
Engine oil filler cap
(→P. 357)
Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 361)
Fuse box (→P. 389)
Battery (→P. 364)
Radiator (→P. 361)
Electric cooling fan
Condenser (→P. 361)
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 356)
Washer fluid tank (→P. 366)
355
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Engine coolant reservoir
(→P. 360)
Engine oil filler cap
(→P. 357)
Engine oil level dipstick
(→P. 356)
Brake fluid reservoir
(→P. 361)
Fuse box (→P. 389)
Battery (→P. 364)
Radiator (→P. 361)
Electric cooling fans
Condenser (→P. 361)
Washer fluid tank (→P. 366)
356
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine oil
With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil
level on the dipstick.
■ Checking the engine oil
Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine
and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the bottom of the engine.
Hold a rag under the end and
pull the dipstick out.
Wipe the dipstick clean.
Reinsert the dipstick fully.
Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check
the oil level.
Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
Low
Full
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
357
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Low
Full
■ Adding engine oil
If the oil level is below or near
the low level mark, add engine
oil of the same type as already in
the engine.
Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before
adding oil.
Remove the oil filler cap.
Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.
Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.
Engine oil selection →P. 468
Oil quantity
(Low → Full)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
1.6 qt. (1.5 L, 1.3 lmp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp. qt.)
Items Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
358
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Engine oil consumption
● The amount of engine oil consumed depends on the oil viscosity, the
quality of the oil and the way the vehicle is driven.
● More oil is consumed under driving conditions such as high speeds and
frequent acceleration and deceleration.
● A new engine consumes more oil.
● When judging the amount of oil consumption, keep in mind that the oil
may have become diluted, making it difficult to judge the true level accu-
rately.
● Oil consumption: Max. 1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 lmp. qt./600 miles (1.0 L per
1000 km)
● If you consume more than 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 lmp. qt.) every 600 miles
(1000 km), contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■ Used engine oil
● Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may
cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should
be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine
oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.
● Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do
not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the
ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for
information concerning recycling or disposal.
● Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.
359
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ To prevent serious engine damage
Check the oil level on a regular basis.
■ When replacing the engine oil
● Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.
● Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.
● Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.
● Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.
360
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Engine coolant
The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”
lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.
Reservoir cap
“FULL”
“LOW”
If the level is on or below the
“LOW” line, add coolant up to the
“FULL” line. (→P. 456)
■ If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing
Visually check the radiator, hoses, coolant reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain
cock and water pump.
If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer test the cap and check for
leaks in the cooling system.
■ Coolant selection
Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene
glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant
with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.
U.S.A.: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant
and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31°F [-35°C])
Canada: “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant
and 45% deionized water. (Enabled: -44°F [-42°C])
For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap.
The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the
cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.
361
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Radiator and condenser
Check the radiator and condenser and remove any foreign objects.
If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of
their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.
Brake fluid
■ Checking fluid level
The brake fluid level should be
between the “MAX” and “MIN”
lines on the tank.
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of
water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion
protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.
■ If you spill coolant
Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.
CAUTION
■ When the engine is hot
Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause seri-
ous injuries, such as burns.
362
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Adding fluid
Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.
Slide and lift up the rubber strip
to partly remove it as shown.
Disconnect the claws and
remove the service cover.
Remove the reservoir cap.
Add brake fluid slowly while checking the fluid level.
Fluid type FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 or SAE J1703 brake fluid
Items Clean funnel
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
363
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■ Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air
Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking effi-
ciency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.
CAUTION
■ When filling the reservoir
Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage
painted surfaces.
If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately.
If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.
NOTICE
■ If the fluid level is low or high
It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads
wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.
If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.
364
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Battery
Check the battery as follows.
■ Battery exterior
Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that
there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.
Terminals
Hold-down clamp
Ground cable
■ Before recharging
When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable
and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:
● If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-
nect the ground cable.
● Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and
disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.
■ After recharging the battery (vehicles with smart key system)
The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the sys-
tem.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Open and close any of the doors.
Restart the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
365
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■ Chemicals in the battery
A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce
hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death
or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the
battery:
● Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.
● Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.
● Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.
● Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.
● Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.
● Keep children away from the battery.
■ Where to safely charge the battery
Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a
garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.
■ How to recharge the battery
Only perform a slow charge (5 A or less). The battery may explode if
charged at a quicker rate.
■ Emergency measures regarding electrolyte
● If electrolyte gets in your eyes
Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-
ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or
cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.
● If electrolyte gets on your skin
Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical
attention immediately.
● If electrolyte gets on your clothes
It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-
ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.
● If you accidentally swallow electrolyte
Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention
immediately.
366
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Washer fluid
If any washer does not work or the low windshield washer fluid level
warning light comes on (if equipped), the washer tank may be empty.
Open the lid.
Add washer fluid.
NOTICE
■ When recharging the battery
Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all
accessories are turned off.
STEP
1
STEP
2
CAUTION
■ When refilling the washer fluid
Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the
washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine
etc.
367
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid
Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.
Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.
■ Diluting washer fluid
Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.
Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-
tle.
368
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tires
Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched-
ules and treadwear.
■ Checking tires
New tread
Treadwear indicator
Worn tread
The location of treadwear
indicators is shown by the
“TWI” or “ ” marks, etc.,
molded on the sidewall of
each tire.
Check spare tire condition
and inflation pressure if not
rotated.
■ Tire rotation
Rotate the tires in the order
shown.
To equalize tire wear and
extend tire life, Toyota recom-
mends that tire rotation is
carried out at the same inter-
val as tire inspection.
■ The tire pressure warning system (U.S.A. only)
Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that
uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low
tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (→P. 422)
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitters.
Front
369
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and
transmitters must also be installed.
When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are
installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes
must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and the tire
pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota
dealer. (→P. 370)
Initializing the tire pressure warning system
The tire pressure warning system must be initialized when changing
the tire size.
When the tire pressure warning system is initialized, the current tire
inflation pressure is set as the pressure benchmark.
■ How to initialize the tire pressure warning system
Park the vehicle in a safe place and turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch or the engine switch OFF.
While the vehicle is moving, initialization is not performed.
Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified cold tire infla-
tion pressure level. (→P. 474)
Make sure to adjust the tire pressure to the specified cold tire
inflation pressure level. The tire pressure warning system will
operate based on this pressure level.
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON
mode (vehicles with smart key system) or the engine switch to
the “ON” position (vehicles without smart key system).
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
370
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Push and hold the tire pressure
warning reset switch until the tire
pressure warning light blinks
slowly 3 times.
Vehicles with smart key system: Wait for a few minutes with
the IGNITION ON mode, and then turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system: Wait for a few minutes
with the engine switch in the “ON” position, and then turn the
engine switch to the “LOCK” position.
Registering ID codes
The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a
unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code of tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter. Have the ID code registered by your
Toyota dealer.
STEP
4
STEP
5
371
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■ When to replace your vehicle’s tires
Tires should be replaced if:
● You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to
expose the fabric, or bulges indicating internal damage
● A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the
size or location of a cut or other damage
If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.
■ Replacing tires and wheels
If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not
registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After
driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.
■ Tire life
Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even
if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.
■ If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires
The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.
■ Maximum load of tire
Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2
of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the
rear axle, whichever is greater.
For the GAWR, see the Certification
Label. For the maximum load of the
tire, see the load limit at maximum cold
tire inflation pressure mentioned on the
sidewall of the tire. (→P. 479)
372
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Low profile tires (vehicles with 17-inch tires)
Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip perfor-
mance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to
standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or
icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather
conditions.
■ Tire types
1 Summer tires
Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway
driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same
traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for
driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered
roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When
installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.
2 All season tires
All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to
be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use
year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction
performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also,
all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance
compared with summer tires in highway driving.
3Snow tires
For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using
snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con-
struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your
vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow
tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without
first checking local regulations for possible restrictions. Snow tires
should be installed on all wheels. (→P. 181)
■ Initializing the tire pressure warning system
Initialize the tires with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the specified
level.
■ If you push the tire pressure warning reset switch accidentally
If initialization is performed, adjust the tire inflation pressure to the speci-
fied level and initialize the tire pressure warning system again.
373
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■ When the initialization of the tire pressure warning system has
failed
Initialization can be completed in a few minutes. However, in the follow-
ing cases, the settings have not been recorded and the system will not
operate properly. If repeated attempts to record tire inflation pressure
settings are unsuccessful, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota
dealer.
● When operating the tire pressure warning reset switch, the tire pres-
sure warning light does not blink 3 times.
● After carrying out the initialization procedure, the tire pressure warn-
ing light blinks for 1 minute then stays on after driving for about 20
minutes.
■ Routine tire inflation pressure checks
The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation
pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of
your routine of daily vehicle checks.
■ Tire pressure warning system certification
FCC ID: PAXPMV107J
FCC ID: HYQ13BCX
NOTE:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC WARNING:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip-
ment.
374
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ When inspecting or replacing tires
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so
may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous han-
dling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or
serious injury.
● Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.
Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.
● Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.
● Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply
tires).
● Do not mix summer, all season and winter tires.
● Do not tow the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed.
■ When initializing the tire pressure warning system
Do not push the tire pressure warning reset switch without first adjusting
the tire inflation pressure to the specified level. Otherwise, the tire pres-
sure warning light may not come on even if the tire inflation pressure is
low, or it may come on when the tire inflation pressure is actually normal.
375
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
NOTICE
■ Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves,
transmitters and tire valve caps
● When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pres-
sure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled
correctly.
● When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than
those specified. The cap may become stuck.
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 369)
■ Driving on rough roads
Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot-
holes.
These conditions may cause losses in tire air pressure, reducing the
cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may
cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels
and body.
■ Low profile tires and wheels
Wheels with profile tires like 17-inch tires may cause greater damage
than usual to the tire wheel when receiving impact from the road surface.
Therefore pay attention to the following:
● Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated,
they may be damaged more severely.
● Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards.
Failure to do so can lead to severe tire and wheel damage.
■ If tire inflation pressures become low while driving
Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.
376
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Tire inflation pressure
■ Tire inflation pressure
The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is dis-
played on the tire and loading information label. (→P. 474)
Type A
Type B
377
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■ Tire inflation pressure check interval
You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least
once a month.
Do not forget to check the spare.
■ Inspection and adjustment procedure
Tire valve
Tire pressure gauge
Remove the tire valve cap.
Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve.
Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge.
If the tire inflation pressure is not at the recommended level
adjust the pressure.
If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to
lower.
After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement
and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check
for leakage.
Reinstall the tire valve cap.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
STEP
6
378
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure
Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:
● Reduced fuel efficiency
● Reduced driving comfort and tire life
● Reduced safety
● Damage to the drive train
If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■ Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure
When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:
● Check only when the tires are cold.
If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been
driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold
tire inflation pressure reading.
● Always use a tire pressure gauge.
The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire infla-
tion pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride
and handling.
● Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal
for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.
● Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.
Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle
is balanced.
379
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
CAUTION
■ Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance
Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions
may occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.
● Excessive wear
● Uneven wear
● Poor handling
● Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires
● Poor sealing of the tire bead
● Wheel deformation and/or tire separation
● A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards
NOTICE
■ When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure
Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.
Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and
cause air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have
been lost, replace them as soon as possible.
380
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Wheels
If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be
replaced.
Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of
handling control.
■ Wheel selection
When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that
they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,
rim width, and inset*.
Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.
*:Conventionally referred to as “offset”.
Toyota does not recommend using:
● Wheels of different sizes or types
● Used wheels
● Bent wheels that have been straightened
■ Aluminum wheel precautions
● Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use
with your aluminum wheels.
● When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the
wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).
● Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using
tire chains.
● Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and
use a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.
381
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■ When replacing wheels
The wheels of your Toyota, except for the compact spare tire, are
equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow
the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the
event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced,
the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed.
(→P. 369)
CAUTION
■ When replacing wheels
● Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in
the Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.
● Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a
tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or seri-
ous injury.
■ When installing the wheel nuts
● Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,
leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can
cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an
accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or
grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.
● Be sure to install the wheel nuts with
the tapered ends facing inward.
Installing the nuts with the tapered
ends facing outward can cause the
wheel to break and eventually cause
the wheel to come off while driving,
which could lead to an accident
resulting in death or serious injury.
Tapered
portion
382
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
NOTICE
■ Replacing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters
● Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-
ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your
Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to
purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your
Toyota dealer.
● Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle.
Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly
with non-genuine wheels.
383
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Air conditioning filter
The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air
conditioning efficiency.
■ Removal method
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
OFF.
Open the glove box. Slide off
the damper.
Push in each side of the glove
box to disconnect the claws.
Remove the filter cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
384
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Checking interval
Replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In
dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be
required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the
“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.)
■ If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically
The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.
NOTICE
■ When using the air conditioning system
Make sure that a filter is always installed.
Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the
system.
■ Replacement method
Remove the air conditioning
filter and replace it with a new
one.
The “↑UP” marks shown on
the filter should be pointing up.
385
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Key battery
Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.
■ You will need the following items:
● Flathead screwdriver (To prevent damage to the key, cover
the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.)
● Small Phillips-head screwdriver
● Lithium battery
Vehicles with smart key system: CR1632
Vehicles without smart key system: CR2025 (Type A)
CR2016 (Type B)
■ Replacing the battery (vehicles with smart key system)
Take out the mechanical key.
Remove the cover.
STEP
1
STEP
2
386
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery with the
“+” terminal facing up.
■ Replacing the battery (vehicles without smart key system)
Remove the cover.
Remove the module.
STEP
3
STEP
1
STEP
2
387
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Type A
Open the case cover using a
flathead screwdriver pro-
tected with tape etc. and
remove the depleted battery.
Insert a new battery (CR2025)
with the “+” terminal facing up.
Type B
Open the case cover using a
coin protected with tape etc.
and remove the depleted bat-
tery.
Insert a new battery (CR2016)
with the “+” terminal facing up.
STEP
3
STEP
3
388
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ If the key battery is discharged
The following symptoms may occur.
● The smart key system and wireless remote control will not function prop-
erly.
● The operational range is reduced.
■ Use the following types of lithium battery
Vehicles with smart key system: CR1632
Vehicles without smart key system: CR2025 (Type A), CR2016 (Type B)
● Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, jewelers, or camera
stores.
● Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by your
Toyota dealer.
● Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.
CAUTION
■ Removed battery and other parts
Keep away from children. These parts are small and if swallowed by a child,
they can cause choking. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
injury.
NOTICE
■ For normal operation after replacing the battery
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.
● Always work with dry hands.
Moisture may cause the battery to rust.
● Do not touch or move any other components inside the remote control.
● Do not bend either of the battery terminals.
389
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Checking and replacing fuses
If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have
blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch OFF.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
OFF.
Open the fuse box cover.
Engine compartment
Push the tab in and lift the lid
off.
Under the driver’s side instrument panel
Remove the lid.
STEP
1
STEP
2
390
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Driver’s side instrument panel
Remove the instrument panel.
After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-
ings” (→P. 393) for details about which fuse to check.
Take out the pullout tool.
Only type A fuse can be
removed using the pullout tool.
For type A and B fuses: Remove the fuse.
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
391
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Check if the fuse has blown.
Type A
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
Type B
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Replace it with one of an
appropriate amperage rating.
The amperage rating can be
found on the fuse box lid.
STEP
6
392
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Type C
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
Type D
Normal fuse
Blown fuse
Contact your Toyota dealer.
393
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Fuse layout and amperage ratings
■ Engine compartment
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 H-LP CLN 30 A No circuit
2 RDI FAN 40 A Electric cooling fan(s)
3 ABS NO. 3 30 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle sta-
bility control system
4 ABS NO. 1 50 A
Anti-lock brake system, vehicle sta-
bility control system
5 HTR 50 A Air conditioning system
6 ALT 120 A
Charging system, RDI FAN, ABS
NO. 1, ABS NO. 3, HTR, HTR SUB
NO. 1, HTR SUB NO. 3, ACC, CIG,
ECU-IG NO. 2, HTR-IG, WIPER,
WASHER, ECU-IG NO. 1, AM1,
DOOR, STOP, FR DOOR,
POWER, RR DOOR, RL DOOR,
OBD, ACC-B, FR FOG, DEF, MIR
HTR, TAIL, PANEL, PWR SEAT,
SUNROOF
7 EPS 60 A Electric power steering
394
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
8 GLOW* 80 A No circuit
9 P/I 50 A EFI MAIN, HORN, IG2
10 H-LP MAIN 50 A
H-LP LH LO, H-LP RH LO, H-LP
LH HI, H-LP RH HI
11 EFI NO. 2 10 A Emission control system
12 EFI NO. 1 10 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system
13 H-LP RH HI 10 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)
14 H-LP LH HI 10 A Left-hand headlight (high beam)
15 H-LP RH LO 10 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)
16 H-LP LH LO 10 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)
17 ETCS 10 A Electronic throttle control system
18 TURN-HAZ 10 A
Turn signal lights, emergency
flashers
19 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system
20 AM2 NO. 2 7.5 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, starting system
21 AM2 30 A Starting system
22 STRG LOCK 20 A Steering lock system
23 IG2 NO. 2 7.5 A Starting system
24 ECU-B2 10 A Air conditioning system
25 ECU-B 10 A
Main body ECU, gauge and meters,
clock
26 RAD NO. 1 15 A Audio system
27 DOME 10 A
Trunk light, smart key system, inte-
rior light
28 AMP* 30 A Audio system
Fuse Ampere Circuit
395
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
*: If equipped
29 MAYDAY* 10 A No circuit
30 SPARE 10 A Spare fuse
31 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse
32 SPARE 20 A Spare fuse
33 EFI MAIN 20 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, EFI NO. 1, EFI NO. 2
34 HORN 10 A Horn
35 IG2 15 A
Multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, starting system, IGN,
METER
36 ST* 7.5 A No circuit
37
HTR SUB
NO. 1
30 A PTC heater
38
HTR SUB
NO. 3
30 A PTC heater
Fuse Ampere Circuit
396
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Under the driver’s side instrument panel
Fuse Ampere Circuit
1 DEF 40 A Rear window defogger, MIR HTR
2 PWR SEAT 30 A Power seat
3 TAIL 10 A
Parking lights, tail lights, license
plate lights, front side marker lights,
multiport fuel injection system/
sequential multiport fuel injection
system, instrument cluster lights
4 PANEL 7.5 A Switch illumination
5 FR DOOR 20 A Power windows, moon roof
6 RL DOOR 20 A Power windows
7 RR DOOR 20 A Power windows
8 SUNROOF 20 A Moon roof
9 CIG 15 A Cigarette lighter
10 ACC 7.5 A
Outside rear view mirrors, audio
system, main body ECU
11 MIR HTR 10 A Outside rear view mirror defogger
12 IGN 7.5 A
Steering lock system, SRS airbag
system, multiport fuel injection sys-
tem/sequential multiport fuel injec-
tion system, front passenger
occupant classification system
13 METER 7.5 A Gauge and meters
397
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
14 POWER 30 A Power windows
15 SEAT HTR 15 A Seat heater
16 HTR-IG 10 A Air conditioning system
17 WIPER 25 A Windshield wipers
18 WASHER 15 A Windshield washer
19 ECU-IG NO. 1 10 A
Automatic transmission, main body
ECU, electric power steering, elec-
tric cooling fan(s), shift lock control
system, anti-lock brake system, tire
pressure warning system, vehicle
stability control system, cruise con-
trol system
20 ECU-IG NO. 2 10 A
Back-up lights, charging system,
rear window defogger, air condi-
tioning system, multiport fuel injec-
tion system/sequential multiport
fuel injection system, moon roof
21 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system
22 STOP 10 A
Stop lights, high mounted stop-
light, anti-lock brake system, main
body ECU, multiport fuel injection
system/sequential multiport fuel
injection system, shift lock control
system, vehicle stability control
system
23 DOOR 25 A Power door lock system
24 ACC-B 25 A CIG, ACC
25 FR FOG 15 A Front fog lights
26 AM1 7.5 A Starting system, ACC, CIG
Fuse Ampere Circuit
398
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ After a fuse is replaced
● If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb
may need replacing. (→P. 399)
● If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your
Toyota dealer.
■ If there is an overload in the circuits
The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.
CAUTION
■ To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire
Observe the following precautions.
Failing to do so may cause damage, and possibly a fire or injury.
● Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any
other object in place of a fuse.
● Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.
Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.
This can cause extensive damage or even fire.
● Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.
NOTICE
■ Before replacing fuses
Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your
Toyota dealer, as soon as possible.
399
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Light bulbs
You may replace the following bulbs yourself. The difficulty level of
replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb
replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.
For more information about replacing other light bulbs, contact your
Toyota dealer.
■ Prepare a replacement light bulb.
Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (→P. 475)
■ Front bulb locations
Headlight high
beams and daytime
running lights
Headlight low beams
Front turn signal and parking lights
Front fog lights (if equipped)
Front side marker lights
400
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Rear bulb locations
Stop/tail and rear side
marker lights
Rear turn signal lights
Back-up lights
License plate lights
401
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Replacing light bulbs
■ Headlight low beams
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the bulb while depress-
ing the lock release.
■ Headlight high beams and daytime running lights
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
402
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
Unplug the bulb while depress-
ing the lock release.
■ Front fog lights (if equipped)
Remove the fender liner bolts
and clip.
Partly remove the fender liner.
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
403
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Unplug the bulb while depress-
ing the lock release.
STEP
3
STEP
4
404
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Front turn signal/parking lights and front side marker lights
Turn the steering wheel away from the side being worked on.
This will move the tire to provide more room.
Remove the fender liner bolts and clips.
Partly remove the fender liner.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
405
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Front side marker light
Front turn signal/parking light
Remove the light bulb.
Front side marker light
Front turn signal/parking light
STEP
4
STEP
5
406
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ Stop/tail and rear side marker lights, and rear turn signal
lights
Open the trunk lid.
Remove the luggage trim cover
clips. Partly remove the luggage
trim cover.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Stop/tail and rear side marker
light
Rear turn signal light
Remove the light bulb.
Stop/tail and rear side marker
light
Rear turn signal light
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
407
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■ Back-up light
Open the trunk lid and remove
the cover.
Turn the bulb base counterclock-
wise.
Remove the light bulb.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
408
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
■ License plate lights
Open the trunk lid and remove
the trunk panel cover clips.
Partly remove the trunk panel
cover and turn the bulb base
counterclockwise.
Remove the light bulb.
■ LED high mounted stoplight
The high mounted stoplight consists of a number of LEDs. If any of
the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have
the light replaced.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
409
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
4
Maintenance and care
■ Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens
Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations.
Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does
not indicate a malfunction.
● Large drops of water have built up on the inside of the lens.
● Water has built up inside the headlight.
■ Removing and installing the fender liner clip
Type A
Type B
Removing
Installing
Removing
Installing
410
4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance
CAUTION
■ Replacing light bulbs
● Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately
after turning off the headlights.
The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.
● Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. Hold the
bulb by the plastic or metal portion.
If the bulb is scratched or dropped it may blow out or crack.
● Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so
may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This
may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.
■ To prevent damage or fire
Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.
412
5-1. Essential information
Emergency flashers
NOTICE
■ To prevent battery discharge
Do not leave the emergency flashers on longer than necessary when the
engine is not running.
Use the emergency flashers if the vehicle malfunctions or is
involved in an accident.
Press the switch to flash all
the turn signal lights. To turn
them off, press the switch
once again.
5
When trouble arises
413
5-1. Essential information
If your vehicle needs to be towed
Before towing
The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact
your Toyota dealer before towing.
● The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.
● The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.
If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by
your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type
truck or a flat bed truck.
Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-
vincial and local laws.
If towing from the front, the vehicle's rear wheels and axles must be
in good condition. (→P. 416)
If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.
414
5-1. Essential information
Emergency towing
If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency
towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads
for short distances at low speeds.
A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The
vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in
good condition.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
Towing eyelet
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Towing eyelet
5
When trouble arises
415
5-1. Essential information
■ Emergency towing procedure
Release the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to N.
Vehicles with smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY (engine
off) or IGNITION ON (engine running) mode.
Vehicles without smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” (engine off) or “ON” (engine
running) position.
CAUTION
■ Caution while towing
● Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.
Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive
stress on the emergency towing eyelet and the cables or chains. Always
be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.
● If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering
will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
416
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a sling-type truck
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck from the front
Release the parking brake.
NOTICE
■ To prevent body damage
Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.
NOTICE
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle
When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at
the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the
vehicle could be damaged while being towed.
5
When trouble arises
417
5-1. Essential information
Towing with a wheel-lift type truck from the rear
Automatic transmission: Use a
towing dolly under the front
wheels.
Manual transmission: We recom-
mend to use a towing dolly under
the front wheels.
When not using a towing dolly,
turn the engine switch to the
“ACC” position and shift the shift
lever to N.
Using a flat bed truck
If you use chains or cables to tie
down your vehicle, the angles
shaded in black must be 45°.
Do not overly tighten the tie
downs or the vehicle may be
damaged.
NOTICE
■ To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission
(automatic transmission)
Never tow this vehicle from the rear with the front wheels on the ground.
■ To prevent damaging the vehicle (manual transmission)
Do not tow the vehicle when the engine switch is in “LOCK” position or key
removed.
The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels
straight.
418
5-1. Essential information
If you think something is wrong
If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably
needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
■ Visible symptoms
● Fluid leaks under the vehicle
(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)
● Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear
● Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points
higher than normal
■ Audible symptoms
● Changes in exhaust sound
● Excessive tire squeal when cornering
● Strange noises related to the suspension system
● Pinging or other noises related to the engine
■ Operational symptoms
● Engine missing, stumbling or running rough
● Appreciable loss of power
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking
● Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road
● Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost
touches the floor
5
When trouble arises
419
5-1. Essential information
Fuel pump shut off system
Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is
activated.
Vehicles with smart key system
Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Restart the engine.
Vehicles without smart key system
Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position.
Restart the engine.
NOTICE
■ Before starting the engine
Inspect the ground under the vehicle.
If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been
damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine. Have the vehi-
cle checked and repaired by your Toyota dealer.
To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an air-
bag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops sup-
plying fuel to the engine.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
1
STEP
2
420
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...
Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle
may be dangerous.
The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-
tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your
Toyota dealer.
*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer: The buzzer sounds to indicate that
the parking brake is still engaged (with the vehicle having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
Stop the vehicle immediately.
The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-
cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a
safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)*
• Low brake fluid
• Malfunction in the brake system
This light also comes on when the parking brake is not
released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully
released the system is operating normally.
Warning light Warning light/Details
Charging system warning light
Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.
Low engine oil pressure warning light
Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.
Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn
on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does
not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.
5
When trouble arises
421
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to
the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.
Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.
Warning light Warning light/Details
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
Malfunction indicator lamp
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The electronic engine control system;
• The electronic throttle control system; or
• The electronic automatic transmission control system (if
equipped).
SRS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The SRS airbag system;
• The front passenger occupant classification system; or
• The seat belt pretensioner system.
(U.S.A.)
(Canada)
ABS warning light
Indicates a malfunction in:
•ABS; or
• The brake assist system.
Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer)
Indicates a malfunction in the EPS system.
Slip indicator light
Indicates a malfunction in:
• The VSC system; or
• The TRAC system.
(Flashes)
Cruise control indicator light (if equipped)
Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.
422
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures.
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
■ If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving
First check the following:
● Is the fuel tank empty?
If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately.
● Is the fuel tank cap loose?
If it is, tighten it securely.
The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after taking several driving trips.
If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, con-
tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
■ When the electric power steering warning light comes on
The steering wheel may become extremely heavy.
If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, firmly
hold and operate it using more force than usual.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
Open door warning light
(warning buzzer)
*1
Indicates that a door or the
trunk is not fully closed.
Check that all doors and the
trunk are closed.
Low fuel level warning
light
Indicates that remaining
fuel is about 2.0 gal. (7.5
L, 1.7 Imp. gal.) or less
Refuel the vehicle.
5
When trouble arises
423
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
(on the instru-
ment cluster)
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
(warning buzzer)
*2
Warns the driver to fasten
his/her seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(on the center
panel)
Front passenger’s seat
belt reminder light
(warning buzzer)
*2
Warns the front passen-
ger to fasten his or her
seat belt.
Fasten the seat belt.
(Canada)
Low windshield washer
fluid level warning light
Low level of washer fluid
Fill the tank.
(U.S.A.)
Maintenance required
reminder light
Indicates that mainte-
nance is required accord-
ing to the driven distance
on the maintenance
schedule.
*3
Illuminates for about 3 sec-
onds and then flashes for
about 15 seconds approxi-
mately 4500 miles (7200
km) after the maintenance
data has been reset.
If necessary, perform main-
tenance.
Comes on and remains on if
the distance driven exceeds
5000 miles (8000 km) after
the maintenance data has
been reset.
(The indicator will not work
properly unless the mainte-
nance data has been reset.)
Perform the necessary
maintenance.
Please reset the mainte-
nance data after the mainte-
nance is performed.
(
→P. 340)
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
424
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*1
:Open door warning buzzer:
The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert the driver that one or more of
the doors or trunk is not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed
of 3 mph [5 km/h]).
*2
:Driver's and front passenger’s seat belt warning buzzers:
The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts warning buzzers sound to alert
the driver and front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The
buzzer sounds intermittently for 10 seconds after the vehicle has reached a
speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the
buzzer will sound at a different tone for 20 more seconds.
*3
:Refer to the separate “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual
Supplement” for the maintenance interval applicable to your vehicle.
(U.S.A.)
Tire pressure warning
light
When the light comes on:
Low tire inflation pressure
such as
• Natural causes (→P. 425)
• Flat tire (→P. 432)
Adjust the tire inflation
pressure to the specified
level.
The light will turn off after
a few minutes. In case
the light does not turn off
even if the tire inflation
pressure is adjusted,
have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.
When the light comes on
after blinking for 1 minute:
Malfunction in the tire
pressure warning system.
(→P. 427)
Have the system checked
by your Toyota dealer.
Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure
5
When trouble arises
425
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ SRS warning light
This warning light system monitors the airbag sensor assembly, front airbag
sensors, side and curtain shield airbag sensors, curtain shield airbag sen-
sors, driver's seat position sensor, driver's seat belt buckle switch, front pas-
senger occupant classification system, “PASSENGER AIR BAG ON”
indicator light, “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front passen-
ger's seat belt buckle switch, seat belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators,
interconnecting wiring and power sources. (→P. 86)
■ Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder
● If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger
detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passen-
ger is not sitting in the seat.
● If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen-
ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.
■
When the tire pressure warning light comes on
Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.
Pushing the tire pressure warning reset switch does not turn off the tire
pressure warning light.
■ The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes
The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such
as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by temper-
ature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the
warning light (after a few minutes).
426
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ When a tire is replaced with a spare tire
The compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will
not turn off even though the flat tire is replaced with the spare tire.
Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the proper tire
inflation pressure. The tire pressure warning light will turn off after a few
minutes.
■ If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative
The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters are used.
● If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is
not registered in the tire pressure warning computer.
● If the tire inflation pressure is 73 psi (500 kPa, 5.1 kgf/cm
2
or bar) or
higher.
The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi-
tions:
(When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.)
● If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies
are nearby.
● If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle.
● If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed.
● If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the
wheels or wheel housings.
● If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota
wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with
some types of tires.)
● If tire chains are used.
5
When trouble arises
427
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking
for 1 minute
If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for 1
minute when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or engine switch is
turned ON, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.
■ Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer
The vehicle speed linked seat belt reminder buzzer can be disabled.
(Customizable features →P. 491) However, Toyota recommends that the
seat belt reminder buzzer be operational to alert the driver and front passen-
ger that the seat belts are not fastened.
CAUTION
■ If the tire pressure warning light comes on
Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could
cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury.
● Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire
inflation pressure immediately.
● If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-
sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires.
If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired
by the nearest Toyota dealer.
● Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,
you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.
■ If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur
The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.
428
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Maintenance of the tires
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure
label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a differ-
ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that
illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-
inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub-
stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire
pressure warning light).
5
When trouble arises
429
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operat-
ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indi-
cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure
warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi-
nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari-
ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning
system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres-
sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to
continue to function properly.
NOTICE
■ Precaution when installing a different tire
When a tire of a different specification or maker is installed, the tire pres-
sure warning system may not operate properly.
430
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Follow the correction procedures. (vehicles with smart key system)
After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,
check that the warning light turns off.
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light
Warning light/Details
Correction
procedure
Once
⎯
(Comes
on for 8
seconds.)
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the electronic
key is not present when the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch is pressed.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key*.
Once
3 times
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that a door other
than the driver’s door has
been opened and closed with
the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other
than OFF and the electronic
key outside of the detection
area.
Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.
Once
3 times
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the driver’s door
has been opened or closed
with the shift lever in P, the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other than
OFF and the electronic key
outside of the detection area.
Turn the
“ENGINE
START
STOP” switch
OFF or con-
firm the loca-
tion of the
electronic
key.
5
When trouble arises
431
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehi-
cle, the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be diffi-
culties receiving the signal from the key. (→P. 29)
Interior
buzzer
Exterior
buzzer
Warning
light
Warning light/Details
Correction
procedure
Continuous
Continuous
Smart key system warning
light
Indicates that the driver’s door
has been opened or closed
with the shift lever not in P, the
“ENGINE START STOP”
switch in any mode other than
OFF and the electronic key
outside of the detection area.
• Shift the shift
lever to P.
• Confirm the
location of the
electronic
key.
432
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you have a flat tire
Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.
■ Before jacking up the vehicle
● Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.
● Set the parking brake.
● Shift the shift lever to P (automatic transmission) or R (manual
transmission).
● Stop the engine.
● Turn on the emergency flashers.
■ Location of the spare tire, jack and tools
*: The jack attachment is used when raising your vehicle with a
floor jack. (→P. 351)
Spare tire
Jack
Wheel nut
wrench
Jack handle
Jack
attachment*
5
When trouble arises
433
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the jack
Remove the luggage floor cover.
Tighten
Loosen
STEP
1
STEP
2
434
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Taking out the spare tire
Remove the luggage floor cover.
Remove the tool tray.
Loosen the center fastener that
secures the spare tire.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
435
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Replacing a flat tire
Chock the tires.
Vehicles with a steel wheel,
remove the wheel ornament
using the wrench.
To protect the wheel ornament,
place a rag between the wrench
and the wheel ornament, as
shown in the illustration.
STEP
1
Flat tire
Wheel
chock
positions
Front
Left-
hand
side
Behind the
rear right-
hand side
tire
Right-
hand
side
Behind the
rear left-
hand side
tire
Rear
Left-
hand
side
In front of
the front
right-hand
side tire
Right-
hand
side
In front of
the front
left-hand
side tire
STEP
2
436
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Slightly loosen the wheel nuts
(one turn).
Turn the tire jack portion “A” by
hand until the notch of the jack is
in contact with the jack point.
The jack point guides are
located under the rocker panel.
They indicate the jack point
positions.
STEP
3
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
437
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Raise the vehicle until the tire is
slightly raised off the ground.
Remove all the wheel nuts and
the tire.
When resting the tire on the
ground, place the tire so that the
wheel design faces up to avoid
scratching the wheel surface.
Installing the tire
Remove any dirt or foreign mat-
ter from the wheel contact sur-
face.
If foreign matter is on the wheel
contact surface, the wheel nuts
may loosen while the vehicle is
in motion, and the tire may
come off the vehicle.
STEP
5
STEP
6
STEP
1
438
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Install the tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand by
approximately the same amount.
Replacing a steel wheel with a compact spare tire
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Replacing an aluminum wheel with a compact spare tire
Tighten the nuts until the tapered
portion comes into loose contact
with the disc wheel seat.
Lower the vehicle.
STEP
2
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
Tapered portion
Disc wheel
seat
STEP
3
5
When trouble arises
439
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Firmly tighten each nut two or
three times in the order shown in
the illustration.
Tightening torque:
76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools.
STEP
4
■ The compact spare tire
● The compact spare tire is identified by the label “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” on the tire sidewall.
Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.
● Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire.
(→P. 474)
■ If you have a flat front tire on a road covered with snow or ice
Install the compact spare tire on the rear of the vehicle. Perform the fol-
lowing steps and fit tire chains to the front tires.
Replace a rear tire with the compact spare tire.
Replace the flat front tire with the tire removed from the rear of
the vehicle.
Fit tire chains to the front tires.
■ After completing the tire change (vehicles with the tire pressure
warning system)
The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (→P. 369)
■ When using the compact spare tire
As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be
warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure
warning light comes on, the light remains on.
STEP
5
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
440
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Using the tire jack
Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to
the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.
● Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or
installing and removing tire chains.
● Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat
tire.
Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for
replacing tires on this vehicle.
● Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.
● Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle while it is supported
by a jack.
● Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the
jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.
● When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.
● Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to
replace the tire.
● Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.
Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one
working on or near the vehicle will be injured.
5
When trouble arises
441
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Replacing a flat tire
● Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the
wheel while the vehicle is moving.
● Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to
loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.
• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 76 ft
•lbf (103
N
•m, 10.5 kgf•m) as soon as possible after changing wheels.
• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the
tapered ends facing inward. (→P. 381)
■ When using the compact spare tire
● Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for
use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another
vehicle.
● Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously.
● Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possi-
ble.
● Avoid sudden acceleration, deceleration and braking, as well as sharp
cornering.
■ Speed limit when using the compact spare tire
Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact
spare tire is installed on the vehicle.
The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing
to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or seri-
ous injury.
442
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ When the spare tire is attached
The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following sys-
tems may not operate correctly:
● ABS & Brake assist
● VSC
● TRAC
NOTICE
■ Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire.
Do not continue driving with a flat tire.
Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the
wheel beyond repair.
■ Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire
installed on the vehicle.
The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire
compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving
over uneven road surfaces.
■ Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire
Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire.
Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving
performance.
■ When replacing the tires
When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure
warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.
5
When trouble arises
443
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit-
ters
When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning
valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is
used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon
as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and
transmitter when replacing the tire. (→P. 369)
444
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the engine will not start
If the engine still does not start after following the correct starting
procedure (→P. 131, 135) or releasing the steering lock (→P. 133,
137), confirm the following points.
■ The engine will not start even when the starter motor oper-
ates normally.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.
Refuel the vehicle.
● The engine may be flooded.
Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting
procedures. (→P. 131, 135)
● There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.
(→P. 81)
■ The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and
headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at
a low volume.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 450)
● The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.
■ The starter motor does not turn over (vehicles with smart
key system).
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an
electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse.
However, an interim measure is available to start the engine.
(→P. 445)
● The electronic key battery is depleted. However, an interim
measure is available to start the engine. (→P. 449)
5
When trouble arises
445
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Emergency start function (vehicles with smart key system)
When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as
an interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP”
switch is functioning normally.
Set the parking brake.
Shift the shift lever to P.
Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY
mode.
Press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for about
15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.
Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system
may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota
dealer.
■ The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and
headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound.
One of the following may be the cause of the problem.
● One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.
● The battery may be discharged. (→P. 450)
● There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system (vehi-
cles with smart key system).
Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if
repair procedures are unknown.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
446
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P (automatic transmission)
If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there
may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent
accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by
your Toyota dealer.
The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to
ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.
Set the parking brake.
Vehicles with smart key system: Turn the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY mode.
Vehicles without smart key system: Turn the engine switch
to the “ACC” position.
Depress the brake pedal.
Pry the cover up with a flat-
head screwdriver or equiva-
lent.
Press the shift lock override
button.
The shift lever can be shifted
while the button is pressed.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
5
When trouble arises
447
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If you lose your keys
New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. For vehicles
with the smart key system, bring the other key and the key number
stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles without the smart key
system, bring a master key and the key number stamped on the key
number plate.
448
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with smart key system)
Locking and unlocking the doors and opening the trunk with the
mechanical key
Doors
Using the mechanical key (→P.
23) in order to perform the fol-
lowing operations.
Locks all doors
Unlocks doors
Turning the key rearward unlocks
the driver’s door. Turning the
mechanical key (→P. 23) once
again within 3 seconds unlocks
the other doors.
Trunk
Turn the mechanical key (→P.
23) clockwise to open.
If communication between the electronic key and the vehicle is inter-
rupted (→P. 29) or the electronic key cannot be used because the
battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote con-
trol cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be
opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure
below.
5
When trouble arises
449
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes and starting the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and apply the brakes.
Touch the Toyota emblem side of
the electronic key to the
“ENGINE START STOP” switch.
An alarm will sound to indicate
that the start function cannot
detect the electronic key that is
touched to the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch if any of the doors
is opened and closed while the
key is touched to the switch.
To change “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes: Within 5
seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and
press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be
changed each time the switch is pressed. (→P. 132)
To start the engine: Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch
within 5 seconds after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake
pedal depressed.
In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be
operated, contact your Toyota dealer.
STEP
1
STEP
2
■ Stopping the engine
Shift the shift lever to P and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as
you normally do when stopping the engine.
■ Replacing the key battery
As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the
electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery is depleted.
(→P. 385)
STEP
3
450
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the battery is discharged
The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi-
cle's battery is discharged.
You can call your Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop.
If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-
cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following
the steps below.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
Remove the engine cover.
Raise the rear of the engine
cover to remove the two rear
clips, and then raise the front
of the engine cover to remove
the two front clips.
STEP
5
STEP
1
5
When trouble arises
451
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Connecting the jumper cables
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
Vehicles with smart key system: Open and close any of the
doors with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle, and turn
the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode
(vehicles with smart key system) or turn the engine switch
to the “ON” position (vehicles without smart key system),
then start the vehicle's engine.
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
452
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Connecting the jumper cables
Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle
Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle
Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine
speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5
minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.
STEP
6
STEP
1
STEP
2
5
When trouble arises
453
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Avoiding a discharged battery
● Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is turned
off.
● Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-
ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.
■ Charging the battery
The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the
vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer-
tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may
discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges
automatically during driving.)
Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle, and turn
the engine switch to the “ON” position, then start the vehi-
cle's engine.
Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper
cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-
nected.
Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota
dealer as soon as possible.
STEP
3
STEP
4
454
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ Avoiding battery fires or explosions
Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-
mable gas that may be emitted from the battery.
● Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it
is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended termi-
nal.
● Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” ter-
minals.
● Do not smoke, use matches, cigarette lighters or allow open flame near
the battery.
■ Battery precautions
The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while
related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-
cautions when handling the battery.
● When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care
not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing
or the vehicle body.
● Do not lean over the battery.
● In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,
immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.
Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention
can be received.
● Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and
other battery-related parts.
● Do not allow children near the battery.
5
When trouble arises
455
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ To prevent damage to the vehicle
Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle, because the catalytic converter may
overheat and become a fire hazard.
■ When handling jumper cables
Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans
or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.
■ When attaching the engine cover (1.8 L 4-cylinder [2ZR-FE] engine)
Ensure that the rubber grommets remain attached to the engine cover. If the
grommet is attached to the bolts, transfer grommets to the engine cover.
456
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle overheats
If your engine overheats:
Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condi-
tioning system.
Check to see if steam is coming out from under the hood.
If you see steam:
Stop the engine. Carefully lift the hood after the steam
subsides and then restart the engine.
If you do not see steam:
Leave the engine running and carefully lift the hood.
Check to see if the cooling fans are operating.
If the fans are operating:
Wait until the temperature of the engine (shown on the
instrument cluster) begins to fall and then stop the
engine.
If the fans are not operating:
Stop the engine and call your Toyota dealer.
After the engine has cooled
down sufficiently, check the
engine coolant level and
inspect the radiator core (radi-
ator) for any leaks.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
5
STEP
4
5
When trouble arises
457
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
■ Overheating
If you observe the following, your vehicle may be overheating.
● The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone or a loss of
power is experienced.
● Steam is coming from under the hood.
CAUTION
■ To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of
your vehicle
● If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until
the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-
ing serious injury such as burns.
● Keep hands and clothing away from the fan and other belts while the
engine is running.
● Do not loosen the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are
hot.
Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam
released under pressure.
Add engine coolant if neces-
sary.
Water can be used in an emer-
gency if engine coolant is
unavailable.
(→P. 471)
Have the vehicle checked at the nearest Toyota dealer as soon as
possible.
STEP
5
458
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ When adding engine coolant
Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.
When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too
quickly can cause damage to the engine.
5
When trouble arises
459
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If the vehicle becomes stuck
CAUTION
■ When attempting to free a stuck vehicle
If you choose to rock the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-
rounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or persons.
The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes
free. Use extreme caution.
■ When shifting the shift lever
For vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift
lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.
This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may
cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.
Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle
becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.
Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift
lever in P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmis-
sion).
Remove the mud, snow, or sand from around the stuck tire.
Place wood, stones or some other material to help provide
traction under the tires.
Restart the engine.
Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (automatic trans-
mission) or 1 or R position (manual transmission), release
the parking brake and carefully apply the accelerator to free
the vehicle.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
5
460
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
NOTICE
■ To avoid damaging the transmission and other components
● Avoid spinning the wheels and do not rev the engine.
● If the vehicle remains stuck after trying these procedures, the vehicle may
require towing to be freed.
5
When trouble arises
461
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency
Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the
vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro-
cedure:
Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly
depress it.
Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the
effort required to slow the vehicle.
Shift the shift lever to N.
If the shift lever is shifted to N
After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the
road.
Stop the engine.
If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N
Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce
vehicle speed as much as possible.
Vehicles without a smart key
system: Stop the engine by
turning the engine switch to
the “ACC” position.
STEP
1
STEP
2
STEP
3
STEP
4
STEP
3
STEP
4
462
5-2. Steps to take in an emergency
CAUTION
■ If the engine has to be turned off while driving
● Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the
brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn.
Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.
● Vehicles without a smart key system: Never attempt to remove the key, as
doing so will lock the steering wheel.
Vehicles with a smart key sys-
tem: Stop the engine by press-
ing and holding the “ENGINE
START STOP” switch for 3
consecutive seconds or more.
Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.
Press and hold for 3 seconds or more
STEP
4
STEP
5
464
6-1. Specifications
Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)
Dimensions and weights
*
1
: Unladen vehicles
*
2
: P195/65R15 tires
*
3
: P205/55R16 and P215/45R17 tires
*
4
: 2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine only
Vehicle identification
■ Vehicle identification number
The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for
your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your
Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.
This number is stamped on the
top left of the instrument panel.
Overall length 179.0 in. (4546 mm)
Overall width 69.4 in. (1762 mm)
Overall height*
1
57.7 in. (1465 mm)
Wheelbase 102.4 in. (2600 mm)
Tread
Front
60.2 in. (1529 mm)
*
2
59.7 in. (1517 mm)*
3
Rear
60.4 in. (1534 mm)
*
2
59.9 in. (1522 mm)*
3
Vehicle capacity weight
(occupants + luggage)
825 lb. (370 kg)
Trailer weight rating*
4
(trailer weight + cargo weight)
1500 lb. (680 kg)
465
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Type A
On some models, this number is
stamped under the front passen-
ger seat.
Type B
On some models, this number is
stamped under the front passen-
ger seat.
This number is also on the Certi-
fication Label on the driver’s side
center pillar.
466
6-1. Specifications
■ Engine number
The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
467
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Engine
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
*: Drive belt tension measured with Borroughs drive belt tension gauge No. BT-
33-73F (used belt), lbf
Model 2ZR-FE engine
Type 4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.17 × 3.48 in. (80.5 × 88.3 mm)
Displacement 109.7 cu.in. (1798 cm
3
)
Drive belt tension* 143 ± 22 lbf (650 ± 100 N, 65 ± 10 kgf)
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
Automatic adjustment
468
6-1. Specifications
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
Fuel
Lubrication system
*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when exchanging.
Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil
level on the dipstick.
Model 2AZ-FE engine
Type 4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline
Bore and stroke 3.48 × 3.78 in. (88.5 × 96.0 mm)
Displacement 144.1 cu.in. (2362 cm
3
)
Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment
Valve clearance (engine cold)
Intake
Exhaust
0.007 ⎯ 0.011 in. (0.19 ⎯ 0.29 mm)
0.015 ⎯ 0.019 in. (0.38 ⎯ 0.48 mm)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only
Octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
13.2 gal. (50 L, 10.9 Imp. gal.)
Oil capacity
(Drain and refill
⎯
reference*)
With filter
Without filter
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
4.4 qt. (4.2 L, 3.7 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
4.0 qt. (3.8 L, 3.3 Imp. qt.)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
4.1 qt. (3.9 L, 3.4 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
3.8 qt. (3.6 L, 3.2 Imp. qt.)
469
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■ Engine oil selection
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use
Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent to satisfy
the following grade and viscosity.
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade engine oil
Recommended viscosity:
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
SAE 0W-20
SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
If SAE 0W-20 is not available,
SAE 5W-20 oil may be used.
However, it must be replaced
with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil
change.
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when
the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
Outside temperature
470
6-1. Specifications
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
SAE 5W-20 or SAE 0W-20
SAE 5W-20 or 0W-20 engine oil
may be used. However, SAE
0W-20 is the best choice for
good fuel economy and good
starting in cold weather.
Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):
• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows
cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier
starting of the engine in cold weather.
• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when
the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a
higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high
speeds, or under extreme load conditions.
How to read oil container label:
The ILSAC (International Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help
you select the oil you should use.
Outside temperature
471
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Cooling system
Ignition system
Capacity
(Reference)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
5.8 qt. (5.5 L, 4.8 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
6.0 qt. (5.7 L, 5.0 Imp. qt.)
Coolant type
Use either of the following.
• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”
• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate,
non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with
long-life hybrid organic acid technology
Do not use plain water alone.
Spark plug
Make
Gap
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
DENSO SC20HR11
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
DENSO SK20R11
NGK IFR6A11
0.043 in. (1.1 mm)
NOTICE
■ Iridium-tipped spark plugs
Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust spark plug gap.
472
6-1. Specifications
Electrical system
Manual transmission
Battery
Open voltage at
68°F (20°C):
12.6 ⎯ 12.8 V Fully charged
12.2 ⎯ 12.4 V Half charged
11.8 ⎯ 12.0 V Discharged
(Voltage checked 20 minutes after the
engine and all the lights turned off)
Charging rates 5 A max.
Gear oil capacity (Reference)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
2.0 qt. (1.9 L, 1.7 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
2.6 qt. (2.5 L, 2.2 Imp. qt.)
Gear oil type
Use either of the following:
• “TOYOTA Genuine Manual Transmission
Gear Oil LV”
• Other gear oil that meets API GL-4 and
SAE 75W specifications
NOTICE
■ Manual transmission gear oil
Please be aware that depending on the particular characteristics of the gear
oil used or the operating conditions, idle sound, shift feeling and/or fuel effi-
ciency may be different or affected. Toyota recommends to use “TOYOTA
Genuine Manual Transmission Gear Oil LV” to achieve optimal performance.
473
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Automatic transmission
Clutch
Brakes
*
1
: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 66 lbf (294 N, 30
kgf) while the engine is running
*
2
: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 44 lbf (200 N, 20
kgf)
Fluid capacity (Reference)
1.8 L 4-cylinder (2ZR-FE) engine
6.9 qt. (6.5 L, 5.7 Imp. qt.)
2.4 L 4-cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine
8.2 qt. (7.8 L, 6.9 Imp. qt.)
Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS
NOTICE
■ Automatic transmission fluid type
Using automatic transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS”
may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission
accompanied by vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your
vehicle.
Pedal free play 0.2 ⎯ 0.6 in. (5 ⎯ 15 mm)
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
Pedal clearance*
1
3.4 in. (87 mm)
Pedal free play 0.04 ⎯ 0.24 in. (1 ⎯ 6 mm)
Brake pad wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lining wear limit 0.04 in. (1.0 mm)
Parking brake lever travel*
2
6 ⎯ 9 clicks
Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3
474
6-1. Specifications
Steering
Tires and wheels
Type A
Type B
Type C
Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)
Tire size P195/65R15 89S, T135/80R16 101M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear: 30 psi (210 kPa, 2.1 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Wheel size 15 × 6 J, 16 × 4T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size P205/55R16 89H, T135/80R16 101M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Wheel size 16 × 6 1/2 J, 16 × 4T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
Tire size P215/45R17 87W, T135/80R16 101M
Tire inflation pressure
(Recommended cold tire
inflation pressure)
Front: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Rear: 32 psi (220 kPa, 2.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm
2
or bar)
Wheel size 17 × 7 J, 16 × 4T (compact spare)
Wheel nut torque 76 ft•lbf (103 N•m, 10.5 kgf•m)
475
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Light bulbs
A: HB4 halogen bulbs B: HB3 halogen bulbs
C: Wedge base bulbs (clear) D: Wedge base bulbs (amber)
E: H11 halogen bulbs F: Double end bulbs
Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type
Exterior
Headlights
Low beam
High beam
9006
9005
51
60
A
B
Front side marker
lights
⎯ 5C
Front turn signal/park-
ing lights
3457NAK 28/8 D
Front fog lights
(if equipped)
⎯ 55 E
Rear turn signal lights ⎯ 21 D
Stop/tail and rear side
marker lights
7443 21/5 C
License plate lights ⎯ 5C
Back-up lights 921 16 C
Interior
Personal lights or per-
sonal/interior lights
⎯ 8C
Interior light ⎯ 8F
Trunk light ⎯ 5C
476
6-1. Specifications
Fuel information
■ Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline
To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that
only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.
■ If your engine knocks
● Consult your Toyota dealer.
● You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-
ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.
■ Gasoline quality
In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gas-
oline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of
gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.
■ Gasoline quality standards
● Automotive manufacturers in the U.S., the Europe and Japan have
developed a specification for fuel quality called World-Wide Fuel Charter
(WWFC) that is expected to be applied worldwide.
● The WWFC consists of four categories that are based on required emis-
sion levels. In the U.S., category 4 has been adopted.
● The WWFC improves air quality by lowering emissions in vehicle fleets,
and improves customer satisfaction through better performance.
You must only use unleaded gasoline in your vehicle.
Select octane rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher. Use
of unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than 87 may result
in engine knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to engine damage.
At minimum, the gasoline you use should meet the specifications
of ASTM D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB3.5-M93 in Canada.
477
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
■ Toyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives
● Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives
to avoid build-up of engine deposits.
● All gasoline sold in the U.S. contains detergent additives to clean and/or
keep clean intake systems.
■ Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline
Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxy-
genates such as ethanol or MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) is available in
many areas.
Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately
blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent
vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
■ Toyota does not recommend blended gasoline
● If you use gasohol in your Toyota, be sure that it has an octane rating no
lower than 87.
● Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.
● Use only gasoline containing a maxi-
mum of 10% ethanol.
DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline
that could contain more than 10% etha-
nol, including from any pump labeled
E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only
some examples of fuel containing more
than 10% ethanol).
DO NOT use gasoline
containing more than 10%
ethanol.
(15% ethanol)
(50% ethanol)
(85% ethanol)
478
6-1. Specifications
■ Toyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-
clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Toyota does not recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel
containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely
affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If
this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.
NOTICE
■ Notice on fuel quality
● Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be
damaged.
● Do not use leaded gasoline.
Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicle’s catalytic converters
causing the emission control system to malfunction.
● Do not use gasohol other than that stated here.
Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance
problems.
● Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than that
stated here will cause persistent heavy knocking.
At worst, this will lead to engine damage.
■ Fuel-related poor driveability
If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor
hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that
type of fuel.
■ When refueling with gasohol
Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.
479
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire information
Typical tire symbols
Full-size tire
Compact spare tire
Tire size (→P. 482)
DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (→P. 481)
Uniform tire quality grading
For details, see “Uniform Tire Quality Grading” that follows.
Location of treadwear indicators (→P. 368)
480
6-1. Specifications
Tire ply composition and materials
Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the
strands which form the plies in a tire.
Radial tires or bias-ply tires
A radial tire has “RADIAL” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“RADIAL” is a bias-ply tire.
TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE
A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the
tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube main-
tains the air pressure.
Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure
(→P. 371)
Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (→P. 474)
This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.
Summer tires or all season tires (→P. 372)
An all season tire has “M+S” on the sidewall. A tire not marked
“M+S” is a summer tire.
“TEMPORARY USE ONLY” (→P. 439)
A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase “TEMPORARY USE
ONLY” molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for temporary
emergency use only.
481
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Typical DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT symbol*
Tire Identification Number
(TIN)
Tire manufacturer's identifica-
tion mark
Tire size code
Manufacturer's optional tire
type code (3 or 4 letters)
Manufacturing week
Manufacturing year
*: The DOT symbol certifies that
the tire conforms to applicable
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards.
482
6-1. Specifications
Tire size
■ Typical tire size information
The illustration indicates typical
tire size.
Tire use
(P = Passenger car,
T = Temporary use)
Section width (millimeters)
Aspect ratio
(tire height to section width)
Tire construction code
(R = Radial, D = Diagonal)
Wheel diameter (inches)
Load index (2 or 3 digits)
Speed symbol
(alphabet with one letter)
■ Tire dimensions
Section width
Tire height
Wheel diameter
483
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire section names
Bead
Sidewall
Shoulder
Tread
Belt
Inner liner
Reinforcing rubber
Carcass
Rim lines
Bead wires
Chafer
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations
issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the
U.S. Department of Transportation.
It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota
vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.
Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as
you read this information.
■ DOT quality grades
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be
found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width.
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
484
6-1. Specifications
■ Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear
rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due
to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
■ Traction AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C,
and they represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking
(straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn-
ing) traction.
■ Temperature A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, represent-
ing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passen-
ger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No.109.
Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo-
ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
485
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Warning: The temperature grades for this tire are established for a
tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa-
rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail-
ure.
Glossary of tire terminology
Tire related term Meaning
Cold tire inflation pres-
sure
Tire pressure when the vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more, or has not
been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under
that condition
Maximum inflation
pressure
The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a
tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of
the tire
Recommended infla-
tion pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a
manufacturer
Accessory weight
The combined weight (in excess of those stan-
dard items which may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steering, power
brakes, power windows, power seats, radio
and heater, to the extent that these items are
available as factory-installed equipment
(whether installed or not)
Curb weight
The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
equipment, including the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air
conditioning and additional weight optional
engine
Maximum loaded vehi-
cle weight
The sum of:
(a) Curb weight
(b) Accessory weight
(c) Vehicle capacity weight
(d) Production options weight
486
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Normal occupant
weight
150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants
specified in the second column of Table 1
* that
follows
Occupant distribution
Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci-
fied in the third column of Table 1
* below
Production options
weight
The combined weight of installed regular pro-
duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in
excess of the standard items which they
replace, not previously considered in curb
weight or accessory weight, including heavy
duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
battery, and special trim
Rim
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
assembly upon which the tire beads are seated
Rim diameter
(Wheel diameter)
Nominal diameter of the bead seat
Rim size designation Rim diameter and width
Rim type designation
The industry manufacturer's designation for a
rim by style or code
Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges
Vehicle capacity
weight (Total load
capacity)
The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb.
(68 kg) times the vehicle's designated seating
capacity
Vehicle maximum load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of the
maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing
by two
Vehicle normal load
on the tire
The load on an individual tire that is determined
by distributing to each axle its share of curb
weight, accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight (distributed in accordance with
Table 1
* below), and dividing by two
487
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Weather side
The surface area of the rim not covered by the
inflated tire
Bead
The part of the tire that is made of steel wires,
wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim
Bead separation
A breakdown of the bond between components
in the bead
Bias ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles
substantially less than 90 degrees to the cen-
terline of the tread
Carcass
The tire structure, except tread and sidewall
rubber which, when inflated, bears the load
Chunking
The breaking away of pieces of the tread or
sidewall
Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire
Cord separation
The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com-
pounds
Cracking
Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner-
liner of the tire extending to cord material
CT
A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire
and rim system in which the rim is designed
with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the
tire is designed to fit on the underside of the
rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges
inside the air cavity of the tire
Extra load tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs
Innerliner
The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a
tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium
within the tire
488
6-1. Specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Innerliner separation
The parting of the innerliner from cord material
in the carcass
Intended outboard
sidewall
(a) The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufac-
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
that is higher or deeper than the same
molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or
(b) The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
metrical tire that has a particular side that
must always face outward when mounted
on a vehicle
Light truck (LT) tire
A tire designated by its manufacturer as prima-
rily intended for use on lightweight trucks or
multipurpose passenger vehicles
Load rating
The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry
for a given inflation pressure
Maximum load rating
The load rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that tire
Maximum permissible
inflation pressure
The maximum cold inflation pressure to which
a tire may be inflated
Measuring rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical
dimension requirements
Open splice
Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or
innerliner that extends to cord material
Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire
Overall width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including eleva-
tions due to labeling, decorations, or protective
bands or ribs
Passenger car tire
A tire intended for use on passenger cars, mul-
tipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that
have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
10,000 lb. or less.
489
6-1. Specifications
6
Vehicle specifications
Tire related term Meaning
Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords
Ply separation
A parting of rubber compound between adja-
cent plies
Pneumatic tire
A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi-
cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that,
when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro-
vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid
that sustains the load
Radial ply tire
A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that
extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90
degrees to the centerline of the tread
Reinforced tire
A tire designed to operate at higher loads and
at higher inflation pressures than the corre-
sponding standard tire
Section width
The linear distance between the exteriors of
the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele-
vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec-
tive bands
Sidewall
That portion of a tire between the tread and
bead
Sidewall separation
The parting of the rubber compound from the
cord material in the sidewall
Snow tire
A tire that attains a traction index equal to or
greater than 110, compared to the ASTM
E-1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when
using the snow traction test as described in
ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for
Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line
on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which
is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at
least one sidewall
Test rim
The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and
may be any rim listed as appropriate for use
with that tire
490
6-1. Specifications
*: Table 1 ⎯ Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seating capacities
Tire related term Meaning
Tread
That portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road
Tread rib
A tread section running circumferentially
around a tire
Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass
Treadwear indicators
(TWI)
The projections within the principal grooves
designed to give a visual indication of the
degrees of wear of the tread
Wheel-holding fixture
The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire
assembly securely during testing
Designated seating
capacity, Number of
occupants
Vehicle normal load,
Number of occupants
Occupant distribution in
a normally loaded vehi-
cle
2 through 4 2 2 in front
5 through 10 3
2 in front, 1 in second
seat
11 through 15 5
2 in front, 1 in second
seat, 1 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
16 through 20 7
2 in front, 2 in second
seat, 2 in third seat, 1
in fourth seat
491
6
Vehicle specifications
6-2. Customization
Customizable features
Item Function Default setting
Customized
setting
Smart key
system (if
equipped)
(
→P. 25)
Smart key system On Off
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
On Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
On Off
Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-
sonalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences
requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your
Toyota dealer.
Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions
being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer.
492
6-2. Customization
Wireless
remote con-
trol (if
equipped)
(
→P. 36)
Wireless remote control On Off
Unlocking operation
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Automatic door lock
function to be activated
if door is not opened
after being unlocked
On Off
Time elapsed before
automatic door lock
function is activated if
door is not opened after
being unlocked
60 seconds
30 seconds
120 seconds
Operation signal
(Emergency flashers)
On Off
Operation signal
(Buzzer)
On Off
Door lock buzzer On Off
Panic function On Off
Trunk unlocking func-
tion
On Off
Trunk unlocking opera-
tion
Press and hold
Press twice
One short press
Item Function Default setting
Customized
setting
493
6-2. Customization
6
Vehicle specifications
Door lock
(vehicles
with power
door lock
system)
(
→P. 41)
Unlocking using a key
Driver's door
unlocked in one
step, all doors
unlocked in two
steps
All doors
unlocked in one
step
Speed-detecting auto-
matic door lock function
(vehicles with smart key
system)
Off On
Opening driver's door
unlocks all doors
Off On
Shifting gears to P
unlocks all doors. (vehi-
cles with an automatic
transmission)
On Off
Shifting gears to posi-
tion other than P locks
all doors. (vehicles with
an automatic transmis-
sion)
On Off
Item Function Default setting
Customized
setting
494
6-2. Customization
Illumination
(
→P. 307)
Time elapsed before
lights turn off (vehicles
with power door lock
system)
15 seconds
7.5 seconds
30 seconds
Operation when the
doors are unlocked
(vehicles with power
door lock system)
On Off
Vehicles with smart key
system: Operation after
the “ENGINE START
STOP” switch is turned
OFF
Vehicles without smart
key system: Operation
after the engine switch
is turned to the “LOCK”
position
On Off
Seat belt
reminder
(
→P. 422)
Vehicle speed linked
seat belt reminder
buzzer
On Off
Item Function Default setting
Customized
setting
495
6
Vehicle specifications
6-3. Initialization
Items to initialize
Item When to initialize Reference
Maintenance data
(U.S.A. only)
After the maintenance is performed P. 340
Tire pressure warning
system (U.S.A. only)
When changing the tire size. P. 369
The following items must be initialized for normal system operation
in cases such as after maintenance is performed on the vehicle.
496
6-3. Initialization
498
Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a
crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA)
in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free:
1-800-331-4331).
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can-
not become involved in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can
also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
499
7
For owners
Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions
extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.
See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in
English.
Utilisation correcte des ceintures de sécurité
● Déroulez la sangle diagonale
de telle sorte qu'elle passe
bien sur l'épaule, sans pour
autant être en contact avec le
cou ou glisser de l'épaule.
● Placez la sangle abdominale
le plus bas possible sur les
hanches.
● Réglez la position du dossier
de siège. Asseyez-vous le dos
le plus droit possible et calez-
vous bien dans le siège.
● Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de
sécurité.
500
Guide confort de ceinture de sécurité (sièges arrière latéraux)
Si la sangle diagonale est proche du cou d’une personne, utilisez le
guide confort de la ceinture de sécurité.
Sortez le guide confort de la
pochette.
Glissez la ceinture dans la fente
du guide.
Le cordon élastique doit être
derrière la ceinture de sécurité.
Attachez-vous, positionnez la
ceinture et relâchez-la.
1
ÉT APE
2
ÉT APE
3
ÉT APE
501
7
For owners
Entretien et soin
■ Ceintures de sécurité
Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une éponge humectée d'eau
savonneuse tiède. Vérifiez régulièrement que les ceintures ne sont
pas effilochées, entaillées ou exagérément usées.
■ Ceinture de sécurité latérale arrière
ATTENTION
■ Détérioration et usure des ceintures de sécurité
Inspectez les ceintures de sécurité périodiquement. Contrôlez qu'elles ne
sont pas entaillées, effilochées et que leurs ancrages ne sont pas desserrés.
Ne pas utiliser une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse avant qu'elle ne soit
remplacée. Une ceinture de sécurité défectueuse n'apporte aucune garantie
de protection de l'occupant en cas d'accident.
Si la ceinture de sécurité est sortie de son
guide, repassez-la dedans avant de
l'utiliser.
502
SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)
The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions
extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.
See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag
instructions in English.
Airbags frontaux
Airbag conducteur et passager avant
Participent à la protection de la tête et du thorax du conducteur
et du passager avant contre les chocs avec des éléments de
l'habitacle.
Airbags latéraux et rideau
Airbags latéraux
Participent à la protection du haut du corps des occupants assis
aux places avant.
Airbags rideau
Participent principalement à la protection de la tête des
occupants assis aux places extérieures.
503
7
For owners
Composition du système d’airbags
Capteurs d’airbag avant
Système de classification
de l'occupant du siège
passager avant (ECU et
capteurs)
Capteurs de porte
Airbag passager avant
Airbags latéraux
Prétensionneurs de
ceintures de sécurité et
limiteurs de force
Capteurs d’airbags latéraux
et rideau
Airbags rideau
Témoins indicateurs
“PASSENGER AIR BAG
ON” et “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF”
Témoin d'alerte SRS
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité
passager avant
Boîtier électronique
d’airbags
Capteurs des airbags
rideau
Airbag conducteur
Contacteur de boucle de
ceinture de sécurité
conducteur
Capteur de position du
siège conducteur
504
Votre véhicule est équipé de ADVANCED AIRBAGS conçus selon les
normes de sécurité américaines applicables aux véhicules à moteur
(FMVSS208). Le boîtier électronique (ECU) des sacs de sécurité
gonflables régule le déploiement de ces derniers sur la base des
informations qu'il reçoit des capteurs, etc. indiqués ci-dessus dans le
schéma illustrant les composants du système. Parmi ces informations
figurent la gravité du choc et l'occupation du véhicule par les
passagers. Le déploiement rapide des airbags est obtenu au moyen
d'une réaction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques, qui
produit un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des
occupants.
505
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les airbags SRS
Respectez les précautions suivantes concernant les airbags.
Autrement, des blessures graves, voire mortelles, pourraient s'ensuivre.
● Le conducteur et tous les passagers à bord du véhicule doivent porter leur
ceinture de sécurité correctement.
Les airbags SRS sont des dispositifs de protection complémentaires aux
ceintures de sécurité.
● L'airbag SRS conducteur se déploie avec une violence considérable, qui
peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le conducteur se trouve très
près de l’airbag.
L’autorité fédérale chargée de la sécurité routière aux États-Unis
(“NHTSA”) conseille:
Sachant que la zone de danger pour l’airbag conducteur se trouve dans
les premiers 2 à 3 in. (50 à 75 mm) de déploiement, vous disposez d’une
marge de sécurité confortable en vous plaçant à 10 in. (250 mm) de votre
airbag conducteur. Cette distance est à mesurer entre le moyeu du volant
et le sternum. Si vous êtes assis à moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez
changer votre position de conduite de différentes façons:
• Reculez votre siège le plus possible, de manière à pouvoir encore
atteindre confortablement les pédales.
• Inclinez légèrement le dossier du siège.
Bien que les véhicules puissent être différents les uns des autres, la
plupart des conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir à une distance de 10 in.
(250 mm), même avec le siège conducteur complètement avancé,
simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de siège. Si vous avez des
difficultés à voir la route après avoir incliné votre siège, utilisez un
coussin ferme et antidérapant pour vous rehausser ou, si votre
véhicule est équipé du réglage en hauteur du siège, remontez-le.
• Si votre volant est réglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet
d'orienter l’airbag en direction de votre poitrine plutôt que de votre tête
et de votre cou.
Réglez votre siège selon ces recommandations de la NHTSA, tout en
conservant le contrôle des pédales, du volant et la vue des commandes
du tableau de bord.
506
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les airbags SRS
● L’airbag SRS passager avant se déploie également avec une violence
considérable, qui peut être très dangereuse voire mortelle si le passager
avant se trouve très près de l’airbag. Éloignez le siège passager avant au
maximum de l’airbag et réglez le dossier de siège de sorte à être assis
bien droit dans le siège.
● Si vous attachez une rallonge de
ceinture de sécurité aux boucles de
ceinture de sécurité avant, mais pas au
pêne de la ceinture de sécurité, les
airbags SRS frontaux détectent que le
conducteur et le passager avant ont
attaché leur ceinture de sécurité, alors
même que ce n'est pas le cas. Dans ce
cas, il se peut que les airbags SRS
frontaux ne se déploient pas
correctement en cas d'accident, et vous
risquez d'être tué ou grièvement
blessé. Veillez à porter la ceinture de
sécurité avec la rallonge de ceinture de
sécurité.
507
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les airbags SRS
● Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou
protégés peuvent être grièvement blessés ou tués par le déploiement d'un
airbag. Installez dans un siège de sécurité enfant les enfants trop jeunes
pour pouvoir utiliser la ceinture de sécurité. Toyota recommande vivement
que les nourrissons et les jeunes enfants soient installés sur le siège
arrière du véhicule et convenablement attachés. Les sièges arrière sont
les plus sûrs pour les nourrissons et les enfants. (oP. 103)
● Ne pas s'asseoir sur le bord du siège et
ne pas s'appuyer contre la planche de
bord.
508
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les airbags SRS
● Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout
devant l’airbag SRS passager avant ou
bien s'asseoir sur les genoux du
passager avant.
● Ne conduisez pas le véhicule lorsque le
conducteur ou le passager avant a
quelque chose de posé sur les genoux.
● Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte,
contre le rail latéral de toit ou contre les
montants avant, latéraux et arrière.
● Interdisez à quiconque de s'agenouiller
sur le siège passager en appui contre
la porte ou de sortir la tête ou les mains
à l'extérieur du véhicule.
● Ne fixez ni ne posez aucun objet sur la
planche de bord ou la garniture
centrale du moyeu de volant.
Au déploiement des airbags SRS
conducteur et passager avant, ces
objets risquent de se transformer en
projectiles.
509
7
For owners
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les airbags SRS
● N'utilisez aucun accessoire de siège venant recouvrir les zones de
déploiement des airbags SRS latéraux, car il risquerait d'en gêner le
déploiement.
● Évitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux zones
renfermant les composants des airbags SRS (oP. 503).
En effet, cela pourrait entraîner un fonctionnement anormal des airbags
SRS.
● Ne touchez aucun composant du système immédiatement après le
déclenchement (gonflage) des airbags SRS, car ils sont alors encore très
chauds.
● Ne rien fixer aux portes, à la vitre du
pare-brise, aux vitres latérales, aux
montants avant et arrière, au rail latéral
de toit et à la poignée de maintien.
● Ne suspendez aux crochets à
vêtements aucun cintre nu ni aucun
objet dur. En cas de déploiement des
airbags rideau SRS, tous ces objets
pourraient se transformer en projectiles
et vous causer des blessures graves,
voire mortelles.
510
ATTENTION
■ Précautions avec les airbags SRS
● Si vous avez des difficultés à respirer après le déploiement de l’airbag
SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien
descendez du véhicule si cela ne présente pas de danger. Essuyez tout
résidu dès que possible afin d'éviter d'éventuelles irritations de la peau.
● Si les parties renfermant les airbags SRS, telles que la garniture du volant
et les garnitures de montants avant et arrière, apparaissent abîmées ou
craquelées, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Toyota.
■ Modification et mise au rebut des éléments du système d’airbags SRS
Consultez impérativement votre concessionnaire Toyota si vous avez besoin
d'intervenir sur votre véhicule ou de procéder à l'une des modifications
suivantes.
Les airbags SRS risquent de ne pas fonctionner correctement ou de se
déployer (gonflage) accidentellement, provoquant ainsi des blessures
graves, voire mortelles.
● Installation, dépose, démontage et réparations des airbags SRS.
● Réparations, modifications, démontage ou remplacement du volant, du
tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des sièges ou de leur garnissage,
des montants avant, latéraux et arrière ou du rail latéral de toit.
● Réparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du bouclier avant ou des
flancs de l'habitacle.
● Installation de chasse-neige, de treuils, etc., sur la calandre (pare-buffle,
pare-kangourou, etc.).
● Modification du système de suspension du véhicule.
● Installation d'appareils électroniques, tels qu'un radioémetteur/récepteur
ou d'un lecteur CD.
● Aménagements du véhicule visant à permettre sa conduite par une
personne atteinte d'un handicap physique.
514
Alphabetical index
Alphabetical index
A/C.....................................206, 212
ABS ...........................................173
Air conditioning filter...............383
Air conditioning system
Air conditioning filter..............383
Automatic air conditioning
system ................................206
Manual air conditioning
system ................................212
Airbags
Airbag operating conditions.....89
Airbag precautions for your
child ......................................93
Airbag warning light...............421
Curtain shield airbag
operating conditions..............90
Curtain shield airbag
precautions...........................93
Front passenger occupant
classification system.............98
General airbag precautions.....93
Locations of airbags................86
Modification and disposal of
airbags..................................97
Proper driving posture.......84, 93
Side airbag operating
conditions..............................90
Side airbag precautions ..........93
SRS airbags............................86
Antenna.....................................234
Anti-lock brake system............173
Ashtray......................................323
Audio input...............................273
Audio system
Antenna.................................234
Audio input............................273
AUX port ...............................273
CD player/changer................236
iPod.......................................252
MP3/WMA disc .....................243
Optimal use...........................269
Portable music player ...........273
Radio.....................................232
Steering wheel audio
switch..................................275
Type......................................220
USB memory.........................261
Automatic air conditioning
system....................................206
Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission.........139
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P .....................446
S mode..................................142
AUX port...................................273
Auxiliary boxes........................317
A
515
Alphabetical index
Back-up lights
Replacing light bulbs............ 399
Wattage................................ 475
Battery
Checking .............................. 364
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery ............. 450
Preparing and checking
before winter...................... 181
Bluetooth
®
audio..................... 279
Bluetooth
®
phone ................... 279
Bottle holder............................ 319
Brake
Fluid...................................... 361
Parking brake....................... 147
Brake assist............................. 173
Break-in tips ............................ 123
Care
Exterior..................................334
Interior...................................336
Seat belts..............................337
Cargo capacity.........................177
CD changer...............................236
CD player ..................................236
Chains.......................................181
Child restraint system
Booster seats, definition........103
Booster seats, installation.....107
Convertible seats,
definition .............................103
Convertible seats,
installation...........................107
Front passenger occupant
classification system.............98
Infant seats, definition...........103
Infant seats, installation.........107
Installing CRS with LATCH
anchors...............................108
Installing CRS with
seat belts ............................110
Installing CRS with top
tether straps........................114
B C
516
Alphabetical index
Child safety
Airbag precautions..................93
Battery precautions.......365, 454
Child restraint system............103
Child-protectors.......................42
How your child should wear
the seat belt..........................62
Installing child restraints........107
Moon roof precautions ............76
Power window lock switch.......71
Power window precautions .....72
Removed key battery
precautions.........................388
Seat belt comfort guide...........59
Seat belt extender
precautions...........................65
Seat belt precautions ..............64
Seat heater precautions........326
Trunk precautions ...................49
Child-protectors.........................42
Cleaning
Exterior..................................334
Interior...................................336
Seat belts..............................337
Clock.........................................322
Compass...................................329
Condenser................................361
Console box .............................312
Cooling system
Engine overheating...............456
Cruise control...........................169
Cup holder................................314
Curtain shield airbags ...............86
Customizable features.............491
Daytime running light
system....................................162
Defogger
Rear window.........................219
Side mirror ............................219
Dimension ................................464
Dinghy towing...................201,202
Display
Trip information.....................156
Do-it-yourself maintenance ....345
Doors
Door lock.....................25, 36, 41
Door windows .........................71
Side mirrors.............................69
Driver's seat belt reminder
light.........................................422
Driving
Break-in tips..........................123
Correct posture.......................84
Procedures............................120
Winter driving tips .................181
D
517
Alphabetical index
Electric power steering........... 173
Electronic key
If your electronic key
battery is discharged.......... 448
Emergency flashers
Switch................................... 412
Emergency, in case of
If a warning light turns on..... 420
If the electronic key does
not operate properly........... 448
If the engine will not start...... 444
If the shift lever cannot be
shifted from P..................... 446
If the vehicle has a
discharged battery ............. 450
If the warning buzzer
sounds............................... 420
If you have a flat tire ............ 432
If you lose your keys............. 447
If you think something is
wrong................................. 418
If your vehicle becomes
stuck................................... 459
If your vehicle has to be
stopped in an emergency... 461
If your vehicle needs to be
towed ................................. 413
If your vehicle overheats...... 456
Engine
Compartment ........................354
Engine switch................131, 135
Hood......................................349
How to start the
engine.........................131, 135
Identification number.............464
If the engine will not start ......444
Ignition switch................131, 135
Overheating...........................456
Engine coolant
Capacity................................471
Checking...............................360
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................181
Engine coolant temperature
gauge......................................149
Engine immobilizer system.......81
Engine oil
Capacity................................468
Checking...............................356
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................181
Engine switch light..................307
EPS............................................173
Event data recorder...................17
E
518
Alphabetical index
Floor mat...................................328
Fluid
Brake.....................................361
Washer..................................366
Fog lights
Replacing light bulbs.............399
Switch....................................164
Wattage.................................475
Front passenger occupant
classification system ..............98
Front passenger's seat belt
reminder light.........................422
Front seats
Adjustment..............................51
Front side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs.............399
Switch....................................160
Wattage.................................475
Front turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............399
Switch....................................146
Wattage.................................475
Fuel
Capacity................................468
Fuel gauge............................149
Fuel pump shut off system....419
Gas station information.........528
Information............................476
Refueling.................................77
Type......................................468
Fuel door.....................................77
Fuel filler door............................77
Fuel pump shut off system.....419
Fuses.........................................389
Gas station information ..........528
Gauges......................................149
Glove box .................................312
Hands-free phone system
(for cellular phone)................279
Hazard lights
Switch ...................................412
Head restraints
Adjusting ................................56
Headlights
Replacing light bulbs.............399
Switch ...................................160
Wattage.................................475
Heaters
Seat heater ...........................326
Side mirror ............................219
Hood..........................................349
Horn ..........................................148
I/M test ......................................344
Identification number
Engine...................................464
Vehicle..................................464
Ignition switch..................131, 135
Illuminated entry system.........308
Indicator lights.........................152
Initialization
Items to initialize ...................495
Inside rear view mirror..............67
Interior lights
Interior lights .........................307
Switch ...................................309
Wattage.................................475
F G
H
I
519
Alphabetical index
Jack
Positioning a floor jack ......... 351
Vehicle-equipped jack.......... 432
Jack handle.............................. 432
Keyless entry............................. 36
Keys
Electronic key......................... 22
Engine switch............... 131, 135
If you lose your keys............. 447
If your electronic key
battery is discharged.......... 448
Ignition switch............... 131, 135
Key number............................ 22
Keyless entry.......................... 36
Keys ....................................... 22
Mechanical key....................... 22
Wireless remote control key... 36
License plate lights
Replacing light bulbs............ 399
Switch................................... 160
Wattage................................ 475
Light bulbs
Replacing ............................. 399
Wattage................................ 475
Lights
Fog light switch..................... 164
Headlights switch ................. 160
Interior light switch................ 309
Personal light switch............. 309
Personal/interior light
switch................................. 310
Replacing light bulbs............ 399
Turn signal lever................... 146
Wattage................................ 475
Load capacity.......................... 180
Lock steering column..... 133, 137
Maintenance
Do-it-yourself
maintenance.......................345
General maintenance............341
Maintenance data..................464
Maintenance requirements....339
Manual air conditioning
system ....................................212
Manual transmission
Manual transmission.............145
Meter
Instrument panel light
control.................................151
Meters...................................149
Mirrors
Inside rear view mirror.............67
Side mirror heater .................219
Side mirrors.............................69
Vanity mirrors........................321
Moon roof ...................................73
MP3 disc ...................................243
Multi-information
display ....................................156
J
K
L
M
520
Alphabetical index
Noise from under vehicle..........15
Odometer..................................149
Oil
Engine oil ..............................356
Opener
Fuel filler door .........................77
Hood......................................349
Trunk.......................................47
Outside rear view mirrors
Adjusting and folding...............69
Outside temperature
display....................................156
Overheating, Engine................456
Parking brake...........................147
Parking lights
Replacing light bulbs.............399
Switch....................................160
Wattage.................................475
Personal lights
Switch....................................309
Wattage.................................475
Personal/interior lights
Switch....................................310
Wattage.................................475
Power outlet .............................325
Power windows..........................71
Radiator ....................................361
Radio.........................................232
Rear seats
Folding down...........................54
Rear side marker lights
Replacing light bulb...............399
Switch ...................................160
Wattage.................................475
Rear turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs.............399
Switch ...................................146
Wattage.................................475
Rear view mirror
Compass...............................329
Rear window defogger............219
Replacing
Fuses....................................389
Key battery............................385
Light bulbs.............................399
Tires......................................432
Reporting safety defects for
U.S.A. owners........................498
Reset the maintenance
data.........................................340
N
O
P
R
521
Alphabetical index
Seat belts
Adjusting the seat belt............ 58
Automatic Locking
Retractor.............................. 61
Child restraint system
installation.......................... 107
Cleaning and maintaining
the seat belts...................... 337
Emergency Locking
Retractor.............................. 61
How to wear your seat belt..... 58
How your child should wear
the seat belt ......................... 62
Pregnant women, proper seat
belt use ................................ 61
Reminder light...................... 422
Seat belt extenders ................ 62
Seat belt pretensioners .......... 60
Seat heaters............................. 326
Seating capacity...................... 180
Seats
Adjustment ............................. 51
Adjustment precautions.......... 53
Child seats/child restraint
system installation.............. 107
Cleaning............................... 336
Head restraint......................... 56
Properly sitting in the seat...... 84
Rear seat folding down........... 54
Seat heaters......................... 326
Service reminder
indicators .............................. 152
Shift lever
Automatic transmission.........139
If the shift lever cannot
be shifted from P.................446
Manual transmission.............145
Shift lock system .....................446
Side airbags................................86
Side marker lights
Replacing light bulbs.............399
Switch....................................160
Wattage.................................475
Side mirror
Adjusting and folding...............69
Smart key system
Entry function..........................25
Starting the engine................131
Spare tire
Inflation pressure...................376
Storage location....................432
Spark plug ................................471
Specifications...........................464
Speedometer............................149
Steering
Column lock release......133, 137
Steering wheel
Adjustment..............................66
Audio switches......................275
Stop lights
Replacing light bulbs.............399
Wattage.................................475
Storage feature.........................311
S
522
Alphabetical index
Storage precautions ................177
Stuck
If your vehicle becomes
stuck ...................................459
Sun visors.................................320
Sunshade
Roof.........................................74
Switch
Emergency flasher switch.....412
Engine switch................131, 135
Fog light switch .....................164
Hazard light switch................412
Ignition switch................131, 135
Light switches........................160
Power door lock switch ...........41
Power window switch..............71
Window lock switch.................71
Wiper and washer switch......166
Tachometer ..............................149
Tail lights
Replacing light bulbs.............399
Switch ...................................160
Wattage.................................475
Theft deterrent system
Engine immobilizer system.....81
Tire inflation pressure.............376
Tire information
Glossary................................485
Size.......................................482
Tire identification number......481
Uniform tire quality
grading................................483
Tires
Chains...................................181
Checking...............................368
If you have a flat tire..............432
Inflation pressure ..................376
Inflation pressure sensor.......369
Information............................479
Replacing..............................432
Rotating tires.........................368
Size.......................................474
Snow tires.............................181
Spare tire ..............................432
T
523
Alphabetical index
Tools......................................... 432
Total load capacity.................. 180
Towing
Dinghy towing............... 201, 202
Emergency towing................ 414
Trailer towing................ 185, 200
TRAC........................................ 173
Traction control....................... 173
Trip information....................... 156
Trip meter................................. 149
Trunk
Opener ................................... 47
Trunk light
Wattage................................ 475
Turn signal lights
Replacing light bulbs............ 399
Switch................................... 146
Wattage................................ 475
Valet key..................................... 22
Vanity mirrors.......................... 321
Vehicle identification
number................................... 464
Vehicle stability control.......... 173
VSC........................................... 173
Warning buzzers
Brake system ........................420
Downshifting..........................143
Seat belt reminder.................422
Warning lights
Anti-lock brake system..........421
Brake assist system..............421
Brake system ........................420
Charging system...................420
Electric power steering
system ................................421
Engine oil maintenance.........422
Engine oil pressure ...............420
Low fuel level ........................422
Low tire pressure warning
light.....................................422
Malfunction indicator lamp ....421
Open door.............................422
Pretensioners........................421
Seat belt reminder light.........422
Smart key system..................430
SRS airbags..........................421
Tire pressure warning light....422
Washer fluid..........................422
V
W
524
Alphabetical index
Washer
Checking...............................366
Preparing and checking
before winter.......................181
Switch....................................166
Washing and waxing ...............334
Weight
Cargo capacity......................177
Load limits.............................180
Weight...................................464
Wheels ......................................380
Window glasses ........................71
Window lock switch...................71
Windows
Power windows.......................71
Rear window defogger..........219
Washer..................................166
Windshield wipers ...................166
Wireless remote control key
Replacing the battery............385
Wireless remote control ..........36
WMA disc..................................243
525
What to do if...
What to do if...
A tire punctures
P. 432
If you have a flat tire
The engine does not start
P. 81
Engine immobilizer system
P. 444
If the engine will not start
P. 448
If the electronic key does not oper-
ate properly
P. 450
If the battery is discharged
The shift lever cannot be
moved out
P. 446
If the shift lever cannot be shifted
from P
The engine coolant temperature
gauge enters the red zone
Steam can be seen coming
from under the hood
P. 456
If your vehicle overheats
The key is lost
P. 447
If you lose your keys
The battery runs out
P. 450
If the battery is discharged
The doors cannot be locked
P. 41
Doors
The vehicle is stuck in
mud or sand
P. 459
If the vehicle becomes stuck
A warning light or indicator light
comes on
P. 420
If a warning light turns on or a
warning buzzer sounds...
526
What to do if...
Type A
Type B
527
What to do if...
■Warning lights
P. 422
or
P. 420 P. 422
P. 420 P. 421
P. 420 P. 421
P. 421
or
P. 421 P. 422
P. 421 P. 422
P. 422
or
P. 421 P. 422
P. 422 P. 430
*: The light flashes to indicate a malfunction.
Brake system warning
light
Tire pressure warning
light
Low windshield washer fluid level
warning light
Charging system warn-
ing light
Electric power steering
warning light
Low engine oil pressure
warning light
Slip indicator
light
Malfunction indicator
lamp
Cruise control indicator
light
*
Open door warning light
SRS warning light
Low fuel level warning
light
ABS warning light
Driver’s seat belt
reminder light
Front passenger’s seat belt
reminder light
Maintenance required
reminder light
Smart key system warn-
ing light
528
GAS STATION INFORMATION
Hood lock release lever
P. 349
Fuel filler door opener
P. 77
Tire inflation pressure
P. 474
Auxiliary catch lever
P. 349
Trunk opener
P. 47
Fuel filler door
P. 77
Fuel tank capacity
(Reference)
13.2 gal. (50 L, 10.9 Imp. gal.)
Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 78, 468
Cold tire inflation pressure P. 474
Engine oil
capacity
(Drain and
refill
⎯
reference)
1.8 L 4-cylinder
(2ZR-FE)
engine
With filter
Without filter
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
4.4 (4.2, 3.7)
4.1 (3.9, 3.4)
2.4 L 4-cylinder
(2AZ-FE)
engine
With filter
Without filter
qt. (L, Imp. qt.)
4.0 (3.8, 3.3)
3.8 (3.6, 3.2)
Engine oil type
“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”
or equivalent
Oil grade: ILSAC multigrade
engine oil
Recommended viscosity: P. 468
